aboutsummaryrefslogtreecommitdiffstats
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
authorJesse Luehrs <doy@tozt.net>2014-04-20 23:53:51 -0400
committerJesse Luehrs <doy@tozt.net>2014-04-20 23:53:51 -0400
commit52ea09e49afd5965fc79d78317a481a29d2c0ff5 (patch)
tree215d76ddf818b67df2d76a97034a26179fb00b90
parent6920ae7ce5828a0221f4fa95fcc426858307d7a9 (diff)
downloadrunes-52ea09e49afd5965fc79d78317a481a29d2c0ff5.tar.gz
runes-52ea09e49afd5965fc79d78317a481a29d2c0ff5.zip
add documentation on escape sequences
i found this a while ago, but i have no idea where it's from - make sure i don't lose it
-rw-r--r--doc/all-escapes.txt9690
1 files changed, 9690 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/doc/all-escapes.txt b/doc/all-escapes.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2d2b29e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/all-escapes.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,9690 @@
+# $Id: all-escapes.txt,v 1.32 2005/09/14 12:00:06 ben Exp $
+
+# This file is hoped to document all the escape sequences supported by
+# terminals that are vaguely compliant with ECMA-48 and friends.
+
+# Changes should be submitted to <bjh21@bjh21.me.uk>
+
+# It includes everything from:
+# <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt220_codes.txt> 1999-05-16
+# <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_reference_card.txt>
+# 1993-02-01
+# <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>1998-09-18
+# <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/ansi_dec_controls_news.txt>
+# 1999-05-16
+# <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/xterm_controls.txt> 1999-10-12
+# <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/color_control_news.txt>
+# 1999-11-13
+# ECMA-48 5th Ed. control functions (section 8.3, annex F)
+# Linux console_codes(4)
+# SunOS 5.7 wscons(7D)
+# UnixWare 7 display(7)
+# IRIX 6.5.5 xwsh(1G)
+# VT220 Reference manual (<URL:http://vt100.net/docs/vt220-rm/>, EK-VT220-RM)
+# <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html> 1999-11-24
+# <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlfunc_dec.html> 1999-12-01
+# <URL:http://www.wyse.com/service/support/kbase/SEQwt.asp?Q=9> (wy75)
+# 1999-07-19
+# <URL:ftp://ftp.cs.cmu.edu/afs/cs/user/ralf/pub/rbcom346.zip#TERM-EMU.DOC>
+# 1999-09-13
+# <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm> 1999-04-19
+# <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-2.htm> 2004-09-27
+# <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm> 2004-09-27
+# <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-1.htm> 1999-04-19
+# <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-2.htm> 2001-05-10
+# iBCS2 description in ESR's termtypes.master version 10.2.7
+# Reflection Terminal Reference Manual for ADDS, ANSI, DG, VT, WYSE, and
+# Unisys Hosts; Version 7.0; September 1998; published by WRQ Inc.
+# DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 (Appendices C, E, and G)
+# OpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW)
+# X Consortium Compound Text Encoding Version 1.1
+
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Section: *** C0 controls ***
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: NUL (^@)
+Mnemonic: NUL
+Description: Null
+
+NUL is used for media-fill or time-fill. NUL characters may be
+inserted into, or removed from, a data stream without affecting the
+information content of that stream, but such action may affect the
+information layout and/or the control of equipment.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.98
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: SOH (^A)
+Mnemonic: SOH
+Description: Start of heading
+
+SOH is used to indicate the beginning of a heading.
+
+The use of SOH is defined in ISO 1745.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.127
+Status: standard
+
+Also used as a prefix for "UnixWindows" commands.
+
+Source: <URL:ftp://ftp.cs.cmu.edu/afs/cs/user/ralf/pub/rbcom346.zip>
+Status: ??? private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: STX (^B)
+Mnemonic: STX
+Description: Start of text
+
+STX is used to indicate the beginning of a text and the end of a
+heading.
+
+The use of STX is defined in ISO 1745.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.146
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ETX (^C)
+Mnemonic: ETX
+Description: End of text
+
+ETX is used to indicate the end of a text.
+
+The use of ETX is defined in ISO 1745.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.50
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: EOT (^D)
+Mnemonic: EOT
+Description: End of transmission
+
+EOT is used to indicate the conclusion of the transmission of one or
+more texts.
+
+The use of EOT is defined in ISO 1745.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.45
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ENQ (^E)
+Mnemonic: ENQ
+Description: Enquiry
+
+ENQ is transmitted by a sender as a request for a response from a
+receiver.
+
+The use of ENQ is defined in ISO 1745.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.44
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ACK (^F)
+Mnemonic: ACK
+Description: Acknowledge
+
+ACK is transmitted by a receiver as an affirmative response to the sender.
+
+The use of ACK is defined in ISO 1745.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.1
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: BEL (^G)
+Mnemonic: BEL
+Description: Bell
+
+BEL is used when there is a need to call for attention; it may control
+alarm or attention devices.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.3
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: BS (^H)
+Mnemonic: BS
+Description: Back space
+
+BS causes the active data position to be moved one character position
+in the data component in the direction opposite to that of the
+implicit movement. The direction of the implicit movement depends on
+the parameter value of SELECT IMPLICIT MOVEMENT DIRECTION (SIMD).
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.5
+
+ BS (0x08, ^H) backspaces one column (but not past the
+ beginning of the line);
+
+Source: Linux console_codes(4)
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: HT (^I)
+Mnemonic: HT
+Description: Character tabulation
+
+HT causes the active presentation position to be moved to the
+following character tabulation stop in the presentation component.
+
+In addition, if that following character tabulation stop has been set
+by TABULATION ALIGN CENTRE (TAC), TABULATION ALIGN LEADING EDGE
+(TALE), TABULATION ALIGN TRAILING EDGE (TATE) or TABULATION CENTRED ON
+CHARACTER (TCC), HT indicates the beginning of a string of text which
+is to be positioned within a line according to the properties of that
+tabulation stop. The end of the string is indicated by the next
+occurrence of HT or CARRIAGE RETURN (CR) or NEXT LINE (NEL) in the
+data stream.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.60
+
+ HT (0x09, ^I) goes to the next tab stop or to the end of
+ the line if there is no earlier tab stop;
+Source: Linux console_codes(4)
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: LF (^J)
+Mnemonic: LF
+Description: Line feed
+
+If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to PRESENTATION, LF
+causes the active presentation position to be moved to the
+corresponding character position of the following line in the
+presentation component.
+
+If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to DATA, LF causes
+the active data position to be moved to the corresponding character
+position of the following line in the data component.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.74
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: VT (^K)
+Mnemonic: VT
+Description: Line tabulation
+
+VT causes the active presentation position to be moved in the
+presentation component to the corresponding character position on the
+line at which the following line tabulation stop is set.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.161
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: VT (^K)
+Description: Reverse Line-feed
+
+The cursor moves up one line, remaining at the same character position
+on the line. If the cursor is already at the top line, nothing
+happens.
+
+Source: SunOS 5.7 wscons(7D)
+Status: Sun private; clashes with ECMA-48 VT
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: FF (^L)
+Mnemonic: FF
+Description: Form feed
+
+FF causes the active presentation position to be moved to the
+corresponding character position of the line at the page home position
+of the next form or page in the presentation component. The page home
+position is established by the parameter value of SET PAGE HOME (SPH).
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.51
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CR (^M)
+Mnemonic: CR
+Description: Carriage return
+
+The effect of CR depends on the setting of the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT
+MODE (DCSM) and on the parameter value of SELECT IMPLICIT MOVEMENT
+DIRECTION (SIMD).
+
+If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to PRESENTATION and
+with the parameter value of SIMD equal to 0, CR causes the active
+presentation position to be moved to the line home position of the
+same line in the presentation component. The line home position is
+established by the parameter value of SET LINE HOME (SLH).
+
+With a parameter value of SIMD equal to 1, CR causes the active
+presentation position to be moved to the line limit position of the
+same line in the presentation component. The line limit position is
+established by the parameter value of SET LINE LIMIT (SLL).
+
+If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to DATA and with a
+parameter value of SIMD equal to 0, CR causes the active data position
+to be moved to the line home position of the same line in the data
+component. The line home position is established by the parameter
+value of SET LINE HOME (SLH).
+
+With a parameter value of SIMD equal to 1, CR causes the active data
+position to be moved to the line limit position of the same line in
+the data component. The line limit position is established by the
+parameter value of SET LINE LIMIT (SLL).
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.15
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: LS1 (^N)
+Mnemonic: LS1
+Description: Locking-shift one
+
+LS1 is used for code extension purposes. It causes the meanings of the
+bit combinations following it in the data stream to be changed.
+
+The use of LS1 is defined in Standard ECMA-35.
+
+NOTE
+LS1 is used in 8-bit environments only; in 7-bit environments
+SHIFT-OUT (SO) is used instead.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 8.3.76
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: SO (^N)
+Mnemonic: SO
+Description: Shift-out
+
+SO is used for code extension purposes. It causes the meanings of the
+bit combinations following it in the data stream to be changed.
+
+The use of SO is defined in Standard ECMA-35.
+
+NOTE
+SO is used in 7-bit environments only; in 8-bit environments
+LOCKING-SHIFT ONE (LS1) is used instead.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.126
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: LS0 (^O)
+Mnemonic: LS0
+Description: Locking-shift zero
+
+LS0 is used for code extension purposes. It causes the meanings of the
+bit combinations following it in the data stream to be changed.
+
+The use of LS0 is defined in Standard ECMA-35.
+
+NOTE
+LS0 is used in 8-bit environments only; in 7-bit environments SHIFT-IN
+(SI) is used instead.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.75
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: SI (^O)
+Mnmonic: SI
+Description: Shift-in
+
+SI is used for code extension purposes. It causes the meanings of the
+bit combinations following it in the data stream to be changed.
+
+The use of SI is defined in Standard ECMA-35.
+
+NOTE
+SI is used in 7-bit environments only; in 8-bit environments
+LOCKING-SHIFT ZERO (LS0) is used instead.
+
+Source: ECMA-35 5th Ed. 8.3.119
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: DLE (^P)
+Mnemonic: DLE
+Description: Data link escape
+
+DLE is used exclusively to provide supplementary transmission control
+functions.
+
+The use of DLE is defined in ISO 1745.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 8.3.33
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: DC1 (^Q)
+Mnemonic: DC1
+Description: Device control one
+
+DC1 is primarily intended for turning on or starting an ancillary
+device. If it is not required for this purpose, it may be used to
+restore a device to the basic mode of operation (see also DC2 and
+DC3), or any other device control function not provided by other DCs.
+
+NOTE
+When used for data flow control, DC1 is sometimes called "X-ON".
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.28
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: DC2 (^R)
+Mnemonic: DC2
+Description: Device control two
+
+DC2 is primarily intended for turning on or starting an ancillary
+device. If it is not required for this purpose, it may be used to set
+a device to a special mode of operation (in which case DC1 is used to
+restore the device to the basic mode), or for any other device control
+function not provided by other DCs.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.29
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: DC3 (^S)
+Mnemonic: DC3
+Description: Device control three
+
+DC3 is primarily intended for turning off or stopping an ancillary
+device. This function may be a secondary level stop, for example wait,
+pause, stand-by or halt (in which case DC1 is used to restore normal
+operation). If it is not required for this purpose, it may be used for
+any other device control function not provided by other DCs.
+
+NOTE
+When used for data flow control, DC3 is sometimes called "X-OFF".
+
+Source: ECMA-48 8.3.30
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: DC4 (^T)
+Mnemonic: DC4
+Description: Device control four
+
+DC4 is primarily intended for turning off, stopping or interrupting an
+ancillary device. If it is not required for this purpose, it may be
+used for any other device control function not provided by other DCs.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 8.3.31
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: DC4 (^T)
+
+Used by the TDSMP (Terminal Device Session Management Protocol) on DEC
+VT4xx terminals. The protocol is patented (US 4791566 & 5165020).
+Commands seems to end with ST.
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt220_codes.txt>
+ [paraphrased]
+Status: DEC private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: NAK (^U)
+Mnemonic: NAK
+Description: Negative acknowledge
+
+NAK is transmitted by a receiver as a negative response to the sender.
+
+The use of NAK is defined in ISO 1745.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.84
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: SYN (^V)
+Mnemonic: SYN
+Description: Synchronous idle
+
+SYN is used by a synchronous transmission system in the absence of any
+other character (idle condition) to provide a signal from which
+synchronism may be achieved or retained between data terminal
+equipment.
+
+The use of SYN is defined in ISO 1745.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.150
+Status: standard
+
+Also used as an introducer for AVATAR commands
+
+Source: <URL:ftp://ftp.cs.cmu.edu/afs/cs/user/ralf/pub/rbcom346.zip>
+Status: ??? private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ETB (^W)
+Mnemonic: ETB
+Description: End of transmission block
+
+ETB is used to indicate the end of a block of data where the data are
+divided into such blocks for transmission purposes.
+
+The use of ETB is defined in ISO 1745.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.49
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CAN (^X)
+Mnemonic: CAN
+Description: Cancel
+
+CAN is used to indicate that the data preceding it in the data stream
+is in error. As a result, this data shall be ignored. The specific
+meaning of this control function shall be defined for each application
+and/or between sender and recipient.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.6
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: EM (^Y)
+Mnemonic: EM
+Description: End of medium
+
+EM is used to identify the physical end of a medium, or the end of the
+used portion of a medium, or the end of the wanted portion of data
+recorded on a medium.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.42
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: SUB (^Z)
+Mnemonic: SUB
+Description: Substitute
+
+SUB is used in the place of a character that has been found to be
+invalid or in error. SUB is intended to be introduced by automatic
+means.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.148
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC (^[)
+Mnemonic: ESC
+Description: Escape
+
+ESCAPE is a control character used for code extension purposes. It
+causes the meaning of a limited number of the bit combinations
+following it in a CC-data-element to be changed. These bit
+combinations, together with the preceding bit combination that
+represents the ESC character, constitute an escape sequence.
+
+Escape sequences provide the coded representations of
+code-identification functions and of some types of control
+functions. The various uses of escape sequences are specified in
+clause 13. Code identification functions are specified in clauses 14
+and 15.
+
+Source: ECMA-35 6th Ed. 6.2.2
+
+An escape sequence shall consist of two or more bytes. In an 8-bit
+code a byte shall be an 8-bit combination. In a 7-bit code a byte
+shall be a 7-bit combination.
+
+The first byte of an escape sequence shall be the bit combination
+representing the ESCAPE character and the last shall be known as the
+Final Byte. An escape sequence may also contain one or more bytes
+known as Intermediate bytes.
+
+The function represented by an escape sequence shall be determined by
+its Intermediate byte(s), if any, and by its Final Byte.
+
+Intermediate bytes shall be any of the 16 positions of column 02 of
+the code table; they are denoted by the symbol I.
+
+Final bytes shall be any of the 79 positions of columns 03 to 07 of
+the code table excluding position 07/15; they are denoted by the
+symbol F.
+
+NOTE 40
+Although, in this Standard, escape sequences are specified in terms of
+bytes or positions in the code table, the meaning of an escape
+sequence is determined only by its bit combinations and it is
+unaffected by any meaning assigned to those bit combinations taken
+individually.
+
+Bit combinations in columns 00 and 01 and the bit combination 07/15
+shall not be used as either Intermediate or Final bytes to construct
+an escape sequence. In an 8-bit code bit combinations in columns 08 to
+15 also shall not be so used.
+
+NOTE 41
+As these prohibited bytes may appear in an escape sequence in error,
+it may be necessary within an application to provide methods of
+identifying such a situation and of recovering from it, but this is
+not covered by this Standard.
+
+Source: ECMA-35 6th Ed. 13.1
+
+[ So, in summary, that's ESC {SP-/}* {0-~} ]
+
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Section: *** nF ***
+Sequences: ESC {SP-/} {SP-/}* {0-~}
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC SP {0-~}
+Mnemonic: ACS
+Description: Announce code structure
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC SP 6
+Mnemonic: S8C1R (also DECAC1)
+Description: C1 receive disabled
+
+The printer receives 7-bit data and C1 control characters (as 7-bit ESC
+Fe sequences).
+
+This description doesn't say what the printer does when it receives an
+8-bit C1 control character in DECTC1 (S7C1R) mode. The LA100 reference
+says that it just truncates the 8th bit of all C1 control characters
+received. Ouch!
+
+Source: Paul Williams <paul@celigne.co.uk> in mail
+ <384A6F50.3349DE09@rdel.co.uk>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC SP 7
+Mnemonic: S7C1R (also DECTC1)
+Description: C1 receive enabled
+
+The printer receives 8-bit data and C1 control characters (as 7-bit ESC
+Fe sequences or single 8-bit bytes).
+
+Source: Paul Williams <paul@celigne.co.uk> in mail
+ <384A6F50.3349DE09@rdel.co.uk>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC SP F
+Mnemonic: S7C1T
+Description: 7-bit C1 controls
+
+The VT220 command ESC SP F (called S7C1T in the DEC documentation) tells
+the terminal to transmit the 7 bit equivalents for the 8 bit C1 codes to
+the host, both for command responses (like the response to CSI c), and
+for function keys which return C1 codes.
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_terminals_news.txt>
+Status: Standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC SP G
+Mnemonic: S8C1T
+Description: 8-bit C1 controls
+
+Likewise, ESC SP G (S8C1T) tells the terminal to transmit 8 bit C1 codes
+if the terminal has an 8 bit data path to the host. (The command has no
+effect if the host port is set to 7 bit mode.)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_terminals_news.txt>
+Status: Standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ! {SP-/}* {0-~}
+Mnemonic: CZD
+Description: C0-designate
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ! @
+Description: C0-designate ECMA-6 IRV C0 set
+
+Source: ECMA-6 6th Ed. 9.2
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC " {SP-/}* {0-~}
+Mnemonic: C1D
+Description: C1-designate
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Section: *** 3F: Single control functions ***
+Sequences: ESC # {SP-/}* {0-~}
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC # {SP-/} 0
+Description: ignoring extensions is OK
+
+Part of the X11 COMPOUND_TEXT encoding, this sequence indicates
+that the string that follows contains extensions beyond version 1,
+but that ignoring those extensions is acceptable. The intermediate
+character is in the range 02/00 to 02/15 and indicates the version
+number minus one of the specification being used.
+
+Source: Compound Text Encoding Version 1.1
+Status: X11 private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC # {SP-/} 1
+Description: ignoring extensions is not OK
+
+Part of the X11 COMPOUND_TEXT encoding, this sequence indicates
+that the string that follows contains extensions beyond version 1,
+and that ignoring those extensions is unacceptable and would lose
+mandatory information. The intermediate character is in the range
+02/00 to 02/15 and indicates the version number minus one of the
+specification being used.
+
+Source: Compound Text Encoding Version 1.1
+Status: X11 private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC # 3
+Mnemonic: DECDHL
+Description: Double-width, double-height line (top half)
+
+ These sequences cause the line containing the cursor to become the top
+ or bottom half of a double-height, double width line. The sequences
+ should be used in pairs on adjacent lines with each line containing the
+ same character string. If the line was single width single height, all
+ characters to the right of the center of the screen will be lost. The
+ cursor remains over the same character position, unless it would be to
+ the right of the right margin, in which case it is moved to the right
+ margin.
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>
+Status: DEC private; VT100
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC # 4
+Mnemonic: DECDHL
+Description: Double-width, double-height line (bottom half)
+
+ These sequences cause the line containing the cursor to become the top
+ or bottom half of a double-height, double width line. The sequences
+ should be used in pairs on adjacent lines with each line containing the
+ same character string. If the line was single width single height, all
+ characters to the right of the center of the screen will be lost. The
+ cursor remains over the same character position, unless it would be to
+ the right of the right margin, in which case it is moved to the right
+ margin.
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>
+Status: DEC private; VT100
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC # 5
+Mnemonic: DECSWL
+Description: Single-width, single-height line
+
+ This causes the line which contains the cursor to become single-width,
+ single-height. The cursor remains on the same character position.
+ This is the default condition for all new lines on the screen.
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>
+Status: DEC private; VT100
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC # 6
+Mnemonic: DECDWL
+Description: Double-width, single-height line
+
+ This causes the line that contains the cursor to become double-width
+ single height. If the line was single width, all characters ro the
+ right of the center of the screen will be lost. The cursor remains
+ over the same character position, unless it would be to the right of
+ the right margin, in which case it is moved to the right margin.
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>
+Status: DEC private; VT100
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC # 7
+Mnemonic: DECHCP
+Description: Hardcopy
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_reference_card.txt>
+Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlfunc_dec.html>
+Status: DEC private; VT100
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC # 8
+Mnemonic: DECALN
+Description: Screen alignment display
+
+ This command causes the VT100 to fill its screen with uppercase Es for
+ screen focus and alignment.
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>
+Status: DEC private; VT100
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC # 9
+Mnemonic: DECFPP
+Description: Perform pending motion
+
+Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE90
+Status: DEC private; LQP02
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Section: *** 4F: Designation of multibyte graphic character sets ***
+Sequences: ESC $ {SP-/} {SP-/}* {0-~}
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC $ ( {SP-/}* {0-~}
+Description: G0-designate multibyte 94-set
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC $ ) {SP-/}* {0-~}
+Description: G1-designate multibyte 94-set
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC $ * {SP-/}* {0-~}
+Description: G2-designate multibyte 94-set
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC $ + {SP-/}* {0-~}
+Description: G3-designate multibyte 94-set
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC $ - {SP-/}* {0-~}
+Description: G1-designate multibyte 96-set
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC $ . {SP-/}* {0-~}
+Description: G2-designate multibyte 96-set
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC $ / {SP-/}* {0-~}
+Description: G3-designate multibyte 96-set
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC % {SP-/}* {0-~}
+Mnemonic: DOCS
+Description: Designate other coding system
+
+15.4.1 Purpose
+
+A code-identification function is provided to designate and invoke an
+identified coding system different from that of this Standard, not
+necessarily a character code. It provides a means for switching
+between coding systems according to this Standard and other coding
+systems when it is not performed at an outer level (e.g. 15.3).
+
+Each such other coding system is registered in the ISO International
+Register of Coded Character Sets (see annex B), together with a Final
+Byte (and where necessary one or more associated Intermediate bytes)
+to identify it.
+
+This function is also recommended for use by such other coding systems
+for returning to the coding system of this Standard, by the use of a
+reserved Final Byte which identifies it.
+
+NOTE 56
+Other standards specify alternative methods for achieving an effect
+similar to that of DOCS, e.g. those based on the upper layers defined
+in ISO 7498 - Open Systems Interconnection, Basic Reference Model.
+
+15.4.2 Specification
+
+Name: DESIGNATE OTHER CODING SYSTEM Acronym: DOCS
+Coded representation: ESC 02/05 F or ESC 02/05 I F
+
+DOCS shall designate and invoke an identified coding system. In the
+coded representation of DOCS the F byte (and any associated I bytes)
+shall identify the coding system.
+
+DOCS with Final Byte 04/00, without I byte, shall designate the coding
+system of this Standard. It is intended for use by other coding
+systems for returning to this coding system. It shall restore the
+state of the coding system to that at the time of invocation of the
+other coding system, that is the state established by announcer
+functions, and the designation and invocation state of graphic
+character and control character sets. Whether or not other states,
+e.g. the active position, are restored is outside the scope of this
+Standard.
+
+DOCS with I byte 02/15 shall mean that the other coding system does
+not use DOCS (F = 04/00), coded as specified here, to return (it may
+have an alternate means to return or none at all). It shall also mean
+that after such a return (if any) the previous state of this coding
+system (i.e. announcements, designations, and invocations) is
+undefined.
+
+DOCS with any other I byte, or with no I byte, shall mean that the
+other coding system uses DOCS (F = 04/00) to return.
+
+Source: ECMA-35 6th Ed. 15.4
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC % / {SP-/}* {0-~}
+Description: switch to a coding system which doesn't support DOCS
+
+Source: ECMA-35 6th Ed. 15.4.2
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC % / 0 length charset STX
+Description: switch to named variable-length encoding
+
+This is part of the X11 COMPOUND_TEXT format, and is used to escape
+to a character encoding not directly supported by that standard.
+This version is for encodings with a variable number of octets per
+character.
+
+"length" consists of two octets, M and L, that between them define
+the number of octets of data that follow to be ((M-128)*128) + (L-128).
+The top bits of M and L are always set. "charset" is a
+character set name from the X Consortium CharSet registry. STX is
+followed by octets encoded in that character set. "length" includes
+the length of the charset name and the STX.
+
+Source: Compound Text Encoding Version 1.1
+Status: X11 private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC % / 1 length charset STX
+Description: switch to named single-byte encoding
+
+The same as ESC % / 0, but with one octet per character.
+
+Source: Compound Text Encoding Version 1.1
+Status: X11 private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC % / 2 length charset STX
+Description: switch to named double-byte encoding
+
+The same as ESC % / 0, but with two octets per character.
+
+Source: Compound Text Encoding Version 1.1
+Status: X11 private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC % / 3 length charset STX
+Description: switch to named triple-byte encoding
+
+The same as ESC % / 0, but with three octets per character.
+
+Source: Compound Text Encoding Version 1.1
+Status: X11 private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC % / 4 length charset STX
+Description: switch to named quadruple-byte encoding
+
+The same as ESC % / 0, but with four octets per character.
+
+Source: Compound Text Encoding Version 1.1
+Status: X11 private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC % / {5-?} length
+Description: begin extended segment
+
+These sequences begin an as-yet undefined kind of extended segment
+in the X11 COMPOUND_TEXT encoding. The "length" is encoded as
+described for ESC % / 0; the rest is undefined.
+
+Source: Compound Text Encoding Version 1.1
+Status: X11 private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC % / @
+Description: switch to ISO/IEC 10646:1993, UCS-2, Level 1
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-2.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC % / A
+Description: switch to ISO/IEC 10646:1993, UCS-4, Level 1
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-2.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC % / B
+Description: Switch to Virtual Terminal service Transparent Set
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-2.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC % / C
+Description: switch to ISO/IEC 10646:1993, UCS-2, Level 2
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-2.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC % / D
+Description: switch to ISO/IEC 10646:1993, UCS-4, Level 2
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-2.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC % / E
+Description: switch to ISO/IEC 10646:1993, UCS-2, Level 3
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-2.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC % / F
+Description: switch to ISO/IEC 10646:1993, UCS-4, Level 3
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-2.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC % / G
+Description: switch to UTF-8 Level 1
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-2.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC % / H
+Description: switch to UTF-8 Level 2
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-2.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC % / I
+Description: switch to UTF-8 Level 3
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-2.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC % / J
+Description: switch to UTF-16 Level 1
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-2.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC % / K
+Description: switch to UTF-16 Level 2
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-2.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC % / L
+Description: switch to UTF-16 Level 3
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-2.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC % 8
+Description: switch to UTF-8
+
+Source: Linux console_codes(4)
+Status: Linux private; obsolete
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC % @
+Description: return to ECMA-35 coding system
+
+Source: ECMA-35 6th Ed. 15.4.2
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC % A
+Description: switch to CSA T 500-1983
+
+Syntax of the North American Videotex/Teletex Presentation Level
+Protocol (NAPLPS), CSA T 500-1983
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC % B
+Description: switch to UCS Transformation Format One (UTF-1)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC % C
+Description: switch to Data Syntax I of CCITT Rec.T.101
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC % D
+Description: switch to Data Syntax II of CCITT Rec.T.101
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC % E
+Description: switch to Photo-Videotex Data Syntax of CCITT Rec. T.101
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC % F
+Description: switch to Audio Data Syntax of CCITT Rec. T.101
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC % G
+Description: switch to UTF-8
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC % H
+Description: switch to VEMMI Data Syntax of ITU-T Rec. T.107
+
+Videotex Enhanced Man Machine Interface (VEMMI) Data Syntax of ITU-T
+Rec. T.107
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-8-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC & {0-~}
+Mnemonic: IRR
+Description: Identify revised registration
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ' {0-~}
+Description: Reserved for future standardisation
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( {SP-/}* {0-~}
+Mnemonic: GZD4
+Description: G0-designate 94-set
+
+[ NB: All character sets listed here are valid for other G?D4 sequnces too. ]
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( ! @
+Description: G0-designate CCITT Greek Primary character set
+
+(IANA name greek-ccitt)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-2.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( ! A
+Description: G0-designate Cuban character set (NC 99-10:81)
+
+(IANA name NC_NC00-10:81)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-2.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( ! B
+Description: G0-designate ISO 646 invariant character set
+
+(no IANA name)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-2.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( ! C
+Description: G0-designate Irish Gaelic character set (I.S. 433:1996)
+
+(no IANA name)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-2.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( ! D
+Description: G0-designate Turkmen character set (Turkmen Standard TDS 565)
+
+(no IANA name)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-2.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( ! E
+Description: G0-designate ANSEL character set (ANSI/NISO Z39.47)
+
+The ANSEL standard is used in bibliographic work. It addresses special
+characters in languages using the Latin alphabet as well as combining
+marks (diacritics) required for romanization and transliteration. In
+ANSEL, non-spacing characters precede the character that they modify.
+
+The MARC 21 Extended Latin character set (published by the Library of
+Congress) is synchronized with ANSEL.
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-2.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( ! F
+Description: G0-designate Turkmen 8-bit character set (TDS 616-2003)
+
+(no IANA name)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-2.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( " 1
+Description: G0-designate Digital Symbol character set
+
+Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE47
+Status: DEC private; LA210
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( 0
+Description: G0-designate VT100 line-drawing set
+
+Source: ???
+Status: DEC private; VT100
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( 1
+Description: G0-designate alternate character ROM (standard)
+
+Source: ???
+Status: DEC private; VT100
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( 2
+Description: G0-designate alternate character ROM (graphics)
+
+Source: ???
+Status: DEC private; VT100
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( 3
+Description: G0-designate HP Roman 8, upper 128 chars
+
+Source: pcvt EscapeSequences
+Status: HP private?
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( 4
+Description: G0-designate Dutch character set
+
+Source: vttest-990212 vt420.c
+Status: DEC private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( 5
+Description: G0-designate Finnish character set
+
+Source: vttest-990212 vt420.c
+Status: DEC private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( 6
+Description: G0-designate Norwegian/Danish character set
+
+Source: vttest-990212 vt420.c
+Status: DEC private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( 7
+Description: G0-designate Swedish character set
+
+Source: pcvt EscapeSequences
+Status: DEC private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( 8
+Description: G0-designate APL character set
+
+Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56
+Status: DEC private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( 9
+Description: G0-designate French Canadian character set
+
+Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56
+Status: DEC private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( <
+Description: G0-designate DEC supplemental character set
+
+Source: http://vt100.net/docs/vt220-rm/chapter4.html
+Status: DEC private; VT200
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( =
+Description: G0-designate Swiss character set
+
+Source: vttest-990212 vt420.c
+Status: DEC private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( >
+Description: G0-designate DEC Technical character set
+
+Source: pcvt EscpaeSequences
+Status: DEC private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( @
+Description: G0-designate ISO-646 IRV
+
+This differs from ASCII in having a currency sign in place of the dollar.
+(IANA name ISO_646.irv:1983)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( A
+Description: G0-designate GB character set
+
+This is the ECMA-6 IRV (ASCII), with hash turned into sterling.
+(IANA name BS_4730)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( B
+Description: G0-designate ECMA-6 IRV
+
+(IANA name ANSI_X3.4-1968)
+
+Source: ECMA-6 6th Ed. 9.2
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( C
+Description: G0-designate NATS main Finnish/Swedish character set
+
+(IANA name NATS-SEFI)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( D
+Description: G0-designate NATS additional Finnish/Swedish graphic set
+
+(IANA name NATS-SEFI-ADD)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( E
+Description: G0-designate NATS main Norwegian/Danish character set
+
+(IANA name NATS-DANO)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( F
+Description: G0-designate NATS additional Norwegian/Danish character set
+
+(IANA name NATS-DANO-ADD)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( G
+Description: G0-designate Swedish basic character set (SEN 85 02 00 Annex B)
+
+(IANA name SEN_850200_B)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( H
+Description: G0-designate Swedish name-writing set (SEN 85 02 00 Annex C)
+
+(IANA name SEN_85020_C)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( I
+Description: G0-designate Katakana character set (JIS C 6220 - 1969)
+
+(IANA name JIS_C6220-1969-jp)
+This character set expects to be in G1
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( J
+Description: G0-designate Roman character set (JIS C 6220 - 1969)
+
+(IANA name JIS_C6220-1969-ro)
+This character set expects to be in G0
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( K
+Description: G0-designate German character set (DIN 66003)
+
+(IANA name DIN_66003)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( K
+Description: G0-designate user-defined character set
+
+Source: Linux console_codes(4)
+Status: Linux private; clashes with ECMA-35
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( L
+Description: G0-designate Portuguese character set
+
+(IANA name PT)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( M
+Description: G0-designate African character set (ISO 6438)
+
+(no IANA name)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( N
+Description: G0-designate basic Cyrillic character set (ISO 5427)
+
+(IANA name ISO_5427)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( O
+Description: G0-designate bibliographic extension character set (DIN 31624)
+
+(no IANA name)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( P
+Description: G0-designate bibliographic extension character set (ISO 5426:1980)
+
+(no IANA name)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( Q
+Description: G0-designate cyrillic bibliographic extension set (ISO 5427:1981)
+
+(IANA name ISO_5427:1981)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( Q
+Description: G0-designate French Canadian character set
+
+Source: vttest-990212 vt420.c
+Status: DEC private?; clashes with ECMA-35
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( R
+Description: G0-designate French character set (NF Z 62-010 (1973))
+
+(IANA name NF_Z_62-010_(1973))
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( S
+Description: G0-designate Greek bibliographic character set (ISO 5428:1980)
+
+(IANA name ISO_5428:1980)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( T
+Description: G0-designate Chinese latin character set (GB 1988 80)
+
+(IANA name GB_1988-80)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( U
+Description: G0-designate Latin-Greek character set (Honeywell-Bull)
+
+(IANA name Latin-greek1)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( U
+Description: G0-designate PC console character set
+
+Source: Linux console_codes(4)
+Status: Linux private; clashes with ECMA-35
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( V
+Description: G0-designate UK Videotex/Teletext character set
+
+(IANA name BS_viewdata)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( W
+Description: G0-designate ISO 646 subset for INIS
+
+(IANA name INIS)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( X
+Description: G0-designate Greek bibliographic character set (ISO 5428)
+
+(no IANA name)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( Y
+Description: G0-designate Italian character set
+
+(IANA name IT)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( Z
+Description: G0-designate Spanish character set
+
+(IANA name ES)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( [
+Description: G0-designate Greek character set
+
+(IANA name greek7-old)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( \
+Description: G0-designate Latin/Greek character set
+
+(IANA name latin-greek)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( ]
+Description: G0-designate INIS non-standard extension character set
+
+(IANA name INIS-8)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( ^
+Description: G0-designate INIS Cyrillic extension character set
+
+(IANA name INIS-cyrillic)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( _
+Description: G0-designate CODAR-U Arabic character set
+
+(no IANA name)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( `
+Description: G0-designate Norwegian/Danish character set (NS 4551)
+
+(IANA name NS_4551-1)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( a
+Description: G0-designate Norwegian character set (NS 4551 version 2)
+
+(IANA name NS_4551-2)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( b
+Description: G0-designate supplementary Videotex character set
+
+(IANA name videotex-suppl)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( c
+Description: G0-designate Videotex mosaic character set
+
+(no IANA name)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( d
+Description: G0-designate seccond Videotex mosaic character set
+
+(no IANA name)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( e
+Description: G0-designate APL character set
+
+(no IANA name)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( f
+Description: G0-designate French character set (NF Z 62-010 (1982))
+
+(IANA name NF_Z_60-010)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( g
+Description: G0-designate Portuguese character set (IBM)
+
+(IANA name PT2)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( h
+Description: G0-designate Spanish character set (IBM)
+
+(IANA name ES2)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( i
+Description: G0-designate Hungarian character set (MSZ 7795/3)
+
+(IANA name MSZ_7795.3)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( j
+Description: G0-designate Greek character set (ELOT)
+
+(IANA name greek7)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( k
+Description: G0-designate Arabic character set (ASMO 449, ISO 9036)
+
+(IANA name ASMO_449)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( l
+Description: G0-designate Latin supplementary character set (ISO 6937/2)
+
+(IANA name iso-ir-90)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( m
+Description: G0-designate Japanese OCR-A character set (JIS C 6229-1984)
+
+(IANA name JIS_C6229-1984-a)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( n
+Description: G0-designate Japanese OCR-B character set (JIS C 6229-1984)
+
+(IANA name JIS_C6229-1984-b)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( o
+Description: G0-designate Japanese addition OCR-B set (JIS C 6229-1984)
+
+(IANA name JIS_C6229-1984-b-add)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( p
+Description: G0-designate Japanese hand-printed OCR set (JIS C 6229-1984)
+
+(IANA name JIS_C6229-1984-hand)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( q
+Description: G0-designate Japanese hand-printed OCR additional set
+
+(IANA name JIS_C6229-1984-hand-add)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( r
+Description: G0-designate Katakana hand-printed OCR set (JIS C 6229-1984)
+
+(IANA name JIS_C6229-1984-kana)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( s
+Description: G0-designate E13B character set (ISO 2033-1983)
+
+(IANA name ISO_2033-1983)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( t
+Description: G0-designate supplemetary Teletext character set (ANSI X3.110)
+
+(IANA name ANSI_X3.110-1983)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( u
+Description: G0-designate Teletext character set (CCITT T.61)
+
+(IANA name T.61-7bit)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( v
+Description: G0-designate Teletext supplementary character set (CCITT T.61)
+
+(IANA name T.61-8bit)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( w
+Description: G0-designate Canadian character set 1 (CSA Z243.4 - 1985)
+
+(IANA name CSA_Z243.4-1985-1)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( x
+Description: G0-designate Canadian character set 2 (CSA Z243.4 - 1985)
+
+(IANA name (CSA_Z243.4-1985-2)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( y
+Description: G0-designate CCITT T.101 Data Syntax I mosaic set
+
+(no IANA name)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( z
+Description: G0-designate Serbocroatian/Slovenian character set (JUS I.B1.002)
+
+(IANA name JUS_I.B1.002)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( {
+Description: G0-designate Serbocroatian Cyrillic character set (JUS I.B1.003)
+
+(IANAN name JUS_I.B1.003-serb)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( |
+Description: G0-designate CCITT T.101 Data Syntax III
+
+(IANA name T.101-G2)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( }
+Description: G0-designate Macedonian Cyrillic charcter set (JUS I.B1.004)
+
+(IANA name JUS_I.B1.003-mac)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-1.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( ~
+Description: G0-designate empty character set
+
+The Final Byte 07/14 shall be reserved to identify the empty set of
+each type, i.e. the set that does not contain any character. If an
+empty set is designated the bit combinations corresponding to the code
+table positions of the set shall not be used, i.e. the (non-existent)
+characters shall not be invoked.
+
+Source: ECMA-35 6th Ed. 14.1
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( % 5
+Description: G0-designate Digtal Supplemental Graphics set
+
+Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
+Status: DEC private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( % 6
+Description: G0-designate Portuguese character set
+
+Source: vttest-990212 vt420.c
+Status: DEC private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ( % =
+Description: G0-designate Hebrew character set
+
+Source: vttest-990212 vt420.c
+Status: DEC private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ) {SP-/}* {0-~}
+Mnemonic: G1D4
+Description: G1-designate 94-set
+
+See GZD4 for character sets
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC * {SP-/}* {0-~}
+Mnemonic: G2D4
+Description: G2-designated 94-set
+
+See GZD4 for character sets
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC + {SP-/}* {0-~}
+Mnemonic: G3D4
+Description: G3-designate 94-set
+
+See GZD4 for character sets
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC , {0-~}
+Description: reserved for future standardisation
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC - {SP-/}* {0-~}
+Mnemonic: G1D6
+Description: G1-designate 96-set
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC - @
+Description: G1-designate RH part of Latin/Cyrillic set (ECMA-113, 1st ed.)
+
+(IANA name ECMA-cyrillic)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC - A
+Description: G1-designate RH part of Latin-1 character set (ISO 8859-1:1987)
+
+(IANA name ISO_8859-1:1987)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC - B
+Description: G1-designate RH part of Latin-2 character set (ISO 8859-2:1987)
+
+(IANA name ISO_8859-2:1987)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC - C
+Description: G1-designate RH part of Latin-3 character set (ISO 8859-3:1988)
+
+(IANA name ISO_8859-3:1988)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC - D
+Description: G1-designate RH part of Latin-4 character set (ISO 8859-4:1988)
+
+(IANA name ISO_8859-4:1988)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC - E
+Description: G1-designate Supplementary Graphic Set (CSA Z243.4-1985)
+
+(IANA name CSA_Z243.4-1985-gr)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC - F
+Description: G1-designate RH part of Latin/Greek set (ISO 8859-7:1987)
+
+(IANA name ISO_8859-7:1987)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC - G
+Description: G1-designate RH part of Latin/Arabic set (ISO 8859-6:1987)
+
+(IANA name ISO_8859-6:1987)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC - H
+Description: G1-designate RH part of Latin/Hebrew set (ISO 8859-8:1988)
+
+(IANA name ISO_8859-8:1988)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC - I
+Description: G1-designate RH part of Czechoslovak set (CSN 369103)
+
+(IANA name CSN_369103)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC - J
+Description: G1-designate Latin supplementary set (ISO 6937-2:1983)
+
+(IANA name ISO_6937-2-add)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC - K
+Description: G1-designate technical character set
+
+(IANA name IEC_P27-1)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC - L
+Description: G1-designate RH part of Latin/Cyrillic set (ISO 8859-5:1988)
+
+(IANA name ISO_8859-5:1988)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC - M
+Description: G1-designate RH part of Latin-5 character set (ISO 8859-9:1989)
+
+(IANA name ISO_8859-9:1989)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC - N
+Description: G1-designate ISO 6937-2:1983 residual set
+
+(IANA name ISO_6937-2-add)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC - O
+Description: G1-designate basic Cyrillic character set (GOST 19768-74)
+
+(IANA name GOST_19768-74)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC - P
+Description: G1-designate Latin-1/2/5 supplemental set
+
+(IANA name ISO_8859-supp)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC - Q
+Description: G1-designate basic box-drawing set (ISO/IEC 10367)
+
+(IANA name ISO_10367-box)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC - R
+Description: G1-designate ISO/IEC 6937:1992 supplementary set
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC - S
+Description: G1-designate CCITT Hebrew supplementary set
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC - T
+Description: G1-designate Thai character set (TIS 620-2533 (1990))
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC - U
+Description: G1-designate Arabic/French/German set
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC - V
+Description: G1-designate RH part of Latin-6 character set (ISO 8859-10:1992)
+
+(IANA name ISO-8859-10)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC - X
+Description: G1-designate Sami supplementary set (for use with Latin-6)
+
+(IANA name latin-lap)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC - Y
+Description: G1-designate Baltic rim supplementary set
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC - Z
+Description: G1-designate RH half of VISCII-2 (TCVN 5712:1993)
+
+(IANA name VISCII)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC - [
+Description: G1-designate IEC technical character set 1 (IEC P1289)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC - \
+Description: G1-desgnate RH part of Latin-1 Welsh variant
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC - ]
+Description: G1-designate RH part of Latin-1 Sami variant
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Dequence: ESC - ^
+Description: G1-designate RH part of Latin/Hebrew set
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC - _
+Description: G1-designate RH part of Celtic set (ISO 8859-14:1998)
+
+(IANA name ISO-8859-14)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC - `
+Description: G1-designate Uralic supplementary Cyrillic set
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC - a
+Description: G1-designate Volgaic supplementary Cyrillic set
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC - b
+Description: G1-designate RH part of Latin-9 character set
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC - c
+Description: G1-designate RH part of Latin-1 set with Euro sign
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC - d
+Description: G1-designate RH part of Latin-4 set with Euro sign
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC - e
+Description: G1-designate RH part of Latin-7 set with Euro sign
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC - f
+Description: G1-designate RH part of Romanian character set (SR 14111:1998)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC - g
+Description: G1-designate Ogham character set (IS 434:1997)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC - i
+Description: G1-designate Sami supplementary set no 2
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC - j
+Description: G1-designate RH part of Latin/Greek set (ISO/IEC 8859-7:2003)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC - k
+Description: G1-designate RH part of Latin/Hebrew set (SI1311:2002)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC - }
+Description: G1-designate supplementary mosaic set (CCITT T.101)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.itscj.ipsj.or.jp/ISO-IR/2-3.htm>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC . {SP-/}* {0-~}
+Mnemonic: G2D6
+Description: G2-designate 96-set
+
+See G1D6 for character sets
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC / {SP-/}* {0-~}
+Mnemonic: G3D6
+Description: G3-designate 96-set
+
+See G1D6 for character sets
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Section: *** Fp: private control functions ***
+Sequences: ESC {0-?}
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC 1
+Description: Graphics proc. option on
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_reference_card.txt>
+Status: DEC private; VT100
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC 1
+Mnemonic: DECHTS
+Description: Horizontal tab set
+
+Sets horizontal tab stop at active column
+
+Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE10
+Status: DEC private; DECwriter, LA100
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC 2
+Description: Graphics proc. option off
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_reference_card.txt>
+Status: DEC private; VT100
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC 2
+Mnemonic: DECCAHT
+Description: Clear all horizontal tabs
+
+Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlfunc_dec.html>
+Status: DEC private; DECwriter
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC 3
+Mnemonic: DECVTS
+Description: Vertical tab set
+
+Sets vertical tab stop at active line
+
+Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE11
+Status: DEC private; printers
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC 4
+Mnemonic: DECCAVT
+Description: Clear all vertical tabs
+
+Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlfunc_dec.html>
+Status: DEC private; DECwriter
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC 5
+Mnemonic: DECXMIT
+Description: Transmit character at cursor
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.wyse.com/service/support/kbase/SEQwt.asp?Q=9>
+Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlfunc_dec.html>
+Status: DEC private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC 6
+Description: Backward index
+Mnemonic: DECBI
+
+/*
+ * VT400 & up.
+ * DECBI - Back Index
+ * This control function moves the cursor backward one column. If the cursor
+ * is at the left margin, then all screen data within the margin moves one
+ * column to the right. The column that shifted past the right margin is lost.
+ *
+ * Format: ESC 6
+ * Description:
+ * DECBI adds a new column at the left margin with no visual attributes. DECBI
+ * is not affected by the margins. If the cursor is at the left border of the
+ * page when the terminal received DECBI, then the terminal ignores DECBI.
+ */
+
+Source: vttest-990212 vt420.c
+Status: DEC private; VT400
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC 7
+Mnemonic: DECSC
+Description: Save cursor
+
+Saves in terminal memory the:
+ cursor position
+ graphic rendition
+ character set shift state
+ state of wrap flag
+ state of origin mode
+ state of selective erase
+
+Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/docs/vt220-rm/chapter4.html>
+Status: DEC private; VT100
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC 8
+Mnemonic: DECRC
+Description: Restore Cursor
+
+Restores the states described for (DECSC) above. If none of these
+characteristics were saved: the cursor moves to home position, origin
+mode is reset, no character attributes are assigned, and the default
+character set mapping is established.
+
+Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/docs/vt220-rm/chapter4.html>
+Status: DEC private; VT100
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC 9
+Mnemonic: DECFI
+Description: Forward index
+
+/*
+ * VT400 & up.
+ *
+ * DECFI - Forward Index
+ * This control function moves the column forward one column. If the cursor is
+ * at the right margin, then all screen data within the margins moves one
+ * column to the left. The column shifted past the left margin is lost.
+ *
+ * Format: ESC 9
+ * Description:
+ * DECFI adds a new column at the right margin with no visual attributes.
+ * DECFI is not affected by the margins. If the cursor is at the right border
+ * of the page when the terminal receives DECFI, then the terminal ignores
+ * DECFI.
+ */
+
+Source: vttest-990212 vt420.c
+Status: DEC private; VT400
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC =
+Mnemonic: DECKPAM
+Description: Keypad application mode
+
+ The auxiliary keypad keys will transmit control sequences.
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>
+Status: DEC private; VT100
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC >
+Mnemonic: DECKPNM
+Description: Keypad numeric mode
+
+ The auxiliary keypad keys will send ASCII codes corresponding to the
+ characters engraved on their keys.
+
+Source: <URL: http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>
+Status: DEC private; VT100
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC Z
+Mnemonic: DECID
+Description: Identify terminal
+
+ This sequence causes the same response as the DA sequence. This
+ sequence will not be supported in future models.
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>
+Status: DEC private; VT100; clashes with ECMA-48
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Section: *** Fs: Standardized single control functions ***
+Sequences: ESC ` to ESC ~
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC `
+Mnemonic: DMI
+Description: Disable manual input
+
+DMI causes the manual input facilities of a device to be disabled.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.34
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC a
+Mnemonic: INT
+Description: Interrupt
+
+INT is used to indicate to the receiving device that the current
+process is to be interrupted and an agreed procedure is to be
+initiated. This control function is applicable to either direction of
+transmission.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.68
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC b
+Mnemonic: EMI
+Description: Enable manual input
+
+EMI is used to enable the manual input facilities of a device.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.43
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC c
+Mnemonic: RIS
+Description: Reset to initial state
+
+RIS causes a device to be reset to its initial state, i.e. the state
+it has after it is made operational. This may imply, if applicable:
+clear tabulation stops, remove qualified areas, reset graphic
+rendition, put all character positions into the erased state, move the
+active presentation position to the first position of the first line
+in the presentation component, move the active data position to the
+first character position of the first line in the data component, set
+the modes into the reset state, etc.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.105
+
+ (DEC) replaces all terminal set-up parameters with NVR values or
+ power-up default values if NVR values do not exist.
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt220_codes.txt>
+ "VT220 Programmer Pocket Guide" EK-VT220-HR-001, page 33
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC d
+Mnemonic: CMD
+Description: Coding method delimiter
+
+CMD is used as the delimiter of a string of data coded according to
+Standard ECMA-35 and to switch to a general level of control.
+
+The use of CMD is not mandatory if the higher level protocol defines
+means of delimiting the string, for instance, by specifying the length
+of the string.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.11
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC d
+Description: Set colour table
+
+ ESC d Only available if PCVT_SETCOLOR was defined when
+ compiling the kernel, allows to set custom color table
+ for more info, see pcvt_out.c ...
+
+Source: pcvt EscapeSequences
+Status: pcvt private; clashes with ECMA-48 CMD
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC l
+Mnemonic: LMA
+Description: Lock memory above
+
+This is an alternative way to set the scrolling region, and is not
+valid in backwards compatibility mode. This sequence sets the top
+margin to the current line, and the bottom margin extends to the last
+row of the screen. This has the effect of locking the rows above the
+current line. This sequence will move the cursor to the beginning of
+the new region.
+
+Source: OpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW)
+Status: HP private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC m
+Mnemonic: USR
+Description: Unlock scrolling region
+
+This sequence can be used to remove the scrolling region. The cursor
+is not moved from its current position. The top, bottom, left and
+right margins are set to cover the entire screen.
+
+Source: OpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW)
+Status: HP private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC n
+Mnemonic: LS2
+Description: Locking-shift two
+
+LS2 is used for code extension purposes. It causes the meanings of the
+bit combinations following it in the data stream to be changed.
+
+The use of LS2 is defined in Standard ECMA-35.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.78
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC o
+Mnemonic: LS3
+Description: Locking-shift three
+
+LS3 is used for code extension purposes. It causes the meanings of the
+bit combinations following it in the data stream to be changed.
+
+The use of LS3 is defined in Standard ECMA-35.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.80
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC { A Ps CR
+Description: Append to a file
+
+Ps is the file name
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/villanova-vt100-esc-codes.txt>
+Status: unknown private; clashes with ECMA-48
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC { R Ps CR
+Descripton: Receive a file
+
+Ps is the file name
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/villanova-vt100-esc-codes.txt>
+Status: unknown private; clashes with ECMA-48
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC { S
+Description: Save collected text
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/villanova-vt100-esc-codes.txt>
+Status: unknown private; clashes with ECMA-48
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC { T Ps CR
+Description: Transmit a file
+
+Ps is the file name
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/villanova-vt100-esc-codes.txt>
+Status: unknown private; clashes with ECMA-48
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC |
+Mnemonic: LS3R
+Description: Locking-shift three right
+
+LS3R is used for code extension purposes. It causes the meanings of
+the bit combinations following it in the data stream to be changed.
+
+The use of LS3R is defined in Standard ECMA-35.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.81
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC }
+Mnemonic: LS2R
+Description: Locking-shift two right
+
+LS2R is used for code extension purposes. It causes the meanings of
+the bit combinations following it in the data stream to be changed.
+
+The use of LS2R is defined in Standard ECMA-35.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.79
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESC ~
+Mnemonic: LS1R
+Description: Locking-shift one right
+
+LS1R is used for code extension purposes. It causes the meanings of
+the bit combinations following it in the data stream to be changed.
+
+The use of LS1R is defined in Standard ECMA-35.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.77
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Section: *** C0 controls (continued) ***
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: IS4 (^\)
+Mnemonic: IS4
+Description: Information separator four (FS - file separator)
+
+IS4 is used to separate and qualify data logically; its specific
+meaning has to be defined for each application. If this control
+function is used in hierarchical order, it may delimit a data item
+called a file, see 8.2.10.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.72
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: IS3 (^])
+Mnemonic: IS3
+Description: Information separator three (GS - group separator)
+
+IS3 is used to separate and qualify data logically; its specific
+meaning has to be defined for each application. If this control
+function is used in hierarchical order, it may delimit a data item
+called a group, see 8.2.10.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.71
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: IS2 (^^)
+Mnemonic: IS2
+Description: Information separator two (RS - record separator)
+
+IS2 is used to separate and qualify data logically; its specific
+meaning has to be defined for each application. If this control
+function is used in hierarchical order, it may delimit a data item
+called a record, see 8.2.10.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.70
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: IS1 (^_)
+Mnemonic: IS1
+Description: Information separator one (US - unit separator)
+
+IS1 is used to separate and qualify data logically; its specific
+meaning has to be defined for each application. If this control
+function is used in hierarchical order, it may delimit a data item
+called a unit, see 8.2.10.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.69
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: DEL
+Mnemonic: DEL
+Description: Delete
+
+The character DELETE (bit combination 07/15, see ISO/IEC 646, clause
+6.5), not being a control function in the strict sense, has been
+removed from the body of the Standard.
+
+DEL was originally used to erase or obliterate an erroneous or
+unwanted character in punched tape. DEL characters may be inserted
+into, or removed from, a CC-data-element without affecting its
+information content, but such action may affect the information layout
+and/or the control of equipment.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. F.8.1
+Status: standard; obsolete
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Section: *** C1 controls ***
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: BPH or ESC B
+Mnemonic: BPH
+Description: Break permitted here
+
+BPH is used to indicate a point where a line break may occur when text
+is formatted. BPH may occur between two graphic characters, either or
+both of which may be SPACE.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.4
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: NBH or ESC C
+Mnemonic: NBH
+Description: No break here
+
+NBH is used to indicate a point where a line break shall not occur
+when text is formatted. NBH may occur between two graphic characters
+either or both of which may be SPACE.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.85
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: IND or ESC D
+Mnemonic: IND
+Description: Index
+
+The control function INDEX (IND) which was coded as an element of the
+C1 set (08/04) and the use of which was already declared deprecated in
+the fourth Edition of this Standard has now been removed.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. F.8.2
+Status: standard; obsolete
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: NEL or ESC E
+Mnemonic: NEL
+Description: Next line
+
+The effect of NEL depends on the setting of the DEVICE COMPONENT
+SELECT MODE (DCSM) and on the parameter value of SELECT IMPLICIT
+MOVEMENT DIRECTION (SIMD).
+
+If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to PRESENTATION and
+with a parameter value of SIMD equal to 0, NEL causes the active
+presentation position to be moved to the line home position of the
+following line in the presentation component. The line home position
+is established by the parameter value of SET LINE HOME (SLH).
+
+With a parameter value of SIMD equal to 1, NEL causes the active
+presentation position to be moved to the line limit position of the
+following line in the presentation component. The line limit position
+is established by the parameter value of SET LINE LIMIT (SLL).
+
+If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to DATA and with a
+parameter value of SIMD equal to 0, NEL causes the active data
+position to be moved to the line home position of the following line
+in the data component. The line home position is established by the
+parameter value of SET LINE HOME (SLH).
+
+With a parameter value of SIMD equal to 1, NEL causes the active data
+position to be moved to the line limit position of the following line
+in the data component. The line limit position is established by the
+parameter value of SET LINE LIMIT (SLL).
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.86
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: SSA or ESC F
+Mnemonic: SSA
+Description: Start of selected area
+
+SSA is used to indicate that the active presentation position is the
+first of a string of character positions in the presentation
+component, the contents of which are eligible to be transmitted in the
+form of a data stream or transferred to an auxiliary input/output
+device.
+
+The end of this string is indicated by END OF SELECTED AREA (ESA). The
+string of characters actually transmitted or transferred depends on
+the setting of the GUARDED AREA TRANSFER MODE (GATM) and on any
+guarded areas established by DEFINE AREA QUALIFICATION (DAQ), or by
+START OF GUARDED AREA (SPA) and END OF GUARDED AREA (EPA).
+
+NOTE
+The control functions for area definition (DAQ, EPA, ESA, SPA, SSA)
+should not be used within an SRS string or an SDS string.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.138
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ESA or ESC G
+Mnemonic: ESA
+Description: End of selected area
+
+ESA is used to indicate that the active presentation position is the
+last of a string of character positions in the presentation component,
+the contents of which are eligible to be transmitted in the form of a
+data stream or transferred to an auxiliary input/output device. The
+beginning of this string is indicated by START OF SELECTED AREA (SSA).
+
+NOTE
+The control function for area definition (DAQ, EPA, ESA, SPA, SSA)
+should not be used within an SRS string or an SDS string.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.47
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: HTS or ESC H
+Mnemonic: HTS
+Description: Character tabulation set
+
+HTS causes a character tabulation stop to be set at the active
+presentation position in the presentation component.
+
+The number of lines affected depends on the setting of the TABULATION
+STOP MODE (TSM).
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.62
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: HTJ or ESC I
+Mnemonic: HTJ
+Description: Character tabulation with justification
+
+HTJ causes the contents of the active field (the field in the
+presentation component that contains the active presentation position)
+to be shifted forward so that it ends at the character position
+preceding the following character tabulation stop. The active
+presentation position is moved to that following character tabulation
+stop. The character positions which precede the beginning of the
+shifted string are put into the erased state.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.61
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: VTS or ESC J
+Mnemonic: VTS
+Description: Line tabulation set
+
+VTS causes a line tabulation stop to be set at the active line (the
+line that contains the active presentation position).
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.162
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: PLD or ESC K
+Mnemonic: PLD
+Description: Partial line forward
+
+PLD causes the active presentation position to be moved in the
+presentation component to the corresponding position of an imaginary
+line with a partial offset in the direction of the line progression.
+This offset should be sufficient either to image following characters
+as subscripts until the first following occurrence of PARTIAL LINE
+BACKWARD (PLU) in the data stream, or, if preceding characters were
+imaged as superscripts, to restore imaging of following characters to
+the active line (the line that contains the active presentation
+position).
+
+Any interactions between PLD and format effectors other than PLU are
+not defined by this Standard.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.92
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: PLU or ESC L
+Mnemonic: PLU
+Description: Partial line backward
+
+PLU causes the active presentation position to be moved in the
+presentation component to the corresponding position of an imaginary
+line with a partial offset in the direction opposite to that of the
+line progression. This offset should be sufficient either to image
+following characters as superscripts until the first following
+occurrence of PARTIAL LINE FORWARD (PLD) in the data stream, or, if
+preceding characters were imaged as subscripts, to restore imaging of
+following characters to the active line (the line that contains the
+active presentation position).
+
+Any interactions between PLU and format effectors other than PLD are
+not defined by this Standard.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.93
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: RI or ESC M
+Mnemonic: RI
+Description: Reverse line feed
+
+If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to PRESENTATION, RI
+causes the active presentation position to be moved in the
+presentation component to the corresponding character position of the
+preceding line.
+
+If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to DATA, RI causes
+the active data position to be moved in the data component to the
+corresponding character position of the preceding line.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.104
+
+In earlier versions of ECMA-48, this was known as "Reverse Index".
+
+Source: Paul Williams <flo@uk.thalesgroup.com> in comp.terminals
+ <3D19AB54.E35A3B25@uk.thalesgroup.com>
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: SS2 or ESC N
+Mnemonic: SS2
+Description: Single-shift two
+
+SS2 is used for code extension purposes. It causes the meanings of the
+bit combinations following it in the data stream to be changed.
+
+The use of SS2 is defined in Standard ECMA-35.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.141
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: SS3 or ESC O
+Mnemonic: SS3
+Description: Single-shift three
+
+SS3 is used for code extension purposes. It causes the meanings of the
+bit combinations following it in the data stream to be changed.
+
+The use of SS3 is defined in Standard ECMA-35.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.142
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: DCS or ESC P
+Mnemonic: DCS
+Description: Device control string
+
+DCS is used as the opening delimiter of a control string for device
+control use. The command string following may consist of bit
+combinations in the range 00/08 to 00/13 and 02/00 to 07/14. The
+control string is closed by the terminating delimiter STRING
+TERMINATOR (ST).
+
+The command string represents either one or more commands for the
+receiving device, or one or more status reports from the sending
+device. The purpose and the format of the command string are specified
+by the most recent occurrence of IDENTIFY DEVICE CONTROL STRING
+(IDCS), if any, or depend on the sending and/or the receiving device.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.27
+
+For Digital VTxxx terminals we've extended this as follows:
+
+DCS <introducer-sequence> <string-data> ST
+
+The introducer sequence follows exactly the same syntax and
+symantics as a control sequence except that CSI is replaced by DCS.
+The <string-data> is control string specific.
+
+Source:
+ <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/ansi_dec_controls_news.txt>
+Status: standard
+Source: vttest-990712 vt420.c
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: DCS Ps g data ST
+Description: LA100 graphics string
+
+Ps =
+0, 1, 5 Dot spacing 7.57 mils (132 dpi)
+
+Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE12
+Status: DEC private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: DCS Ps p Pr ST
+Description: ReGIS graphics
+
+ DCS p or DCS 0 p
+ Re-enter ReGIS at the point where it was last exited. Does
+ not display commands.
+
+ DCS 1 p
+ Enter ReGIS at command level; ReGIS begins a new command.
+ Does not display commands.
+
+ DCS x+2 p, x=0 or 1
+ Like DCS x p, but displays commands on the screen's bottom
+ line.
+
+[ Pr is a ReGIS string, which I'm not going to document here just yet. ]
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_regis_news.txt>
+Status: DEC private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: DCS P1 ; P2 ; P3 q Ps ST
+Description: Sixel graphics
+
+ P1 is the macro parameter. This parameter indicates the pixel
+ aspect ratio used by the application or terminal. The pixel
+ aspect ratio defines the shape of the pixel dots the terminal
+ uses to draw images. For example, a pixel that is twice as high
+ as it is wide has an aspect ratio of 2:1.
+
+ NOTE: The macro parameter is provided for compatibility with
+ existing Digital software. New applications should set P1 to 0
+ and use the set raster attributes control, described later in
+ this chapter.
+
+ P1 Pixel Aspect Ratio
+ (Vertical:Horizontal)
+
+ Omitted 2:1
+ 0 or 1 5:1
+ 2 3:1
+ 3 or 4 2:1
+ 5 or 6 2:1
+ 7,8, or 9 1:1
+
+ P2 selects how the terminal draws the background color. You can 3$
+ use one of three values.
+
+ P2 Meaning
+
+ 0 or 2 Pixel positions specified as 0 are set to the
+ current background color.
+
+ 1 Pixel positions specified as 0 remain at their
+ current color.
+
+ P3 is the horizontal grid size parameter. The horizontal grid
+ size is the horizontal distance between two pixel dots. The
+ VT300 ignores this parameter because the horizontal grid size is
+ fixed at 0.0195 cm (0.0075 in).
+
+In the data section:
+
+Characters from ? to ~ encode a column of pixels one wide and six
+high. ? is all-zeros, ~ is all-ones and the low-order bit is at the
+top.
+
+! Pn encodes a repeat count of the following character
+- causes the next band of sixels to start below the current one at the left
+ margin
+$ causes the next band to overlay the current one, starting at the left margin.
+# Pn selects palette entry Pn.
+# Pn1 ; Pn2 ; Pn3 ; Pn4 ; Pn5 sets palette entry Pn1 to contain the colour
+ (Pn3, Pn4, Pn5) in the colour space represented by Pn1 (1 = HLS, 2 = RGB).
+Anything else is ignored.
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/all_about_sixels.txt>
+Status: DEC private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: DCS v data ST
+Description: Answerback message entry
+
+Data consists of up to 30 characters coded in hex.
+
+Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56
+Status: DEC private; LA100
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: DCS Ps1 ; Ps2 ... x Pstr ST
+Description: DECtalk commands
+
+Synchronize <ESC> P;11x <ESC> \
+Load Dictionary <ESC> P0;40z name sub ESC \
+Answer Phone <ESC> P;60;10;[number of rings]z <ESC> \
+Hang Up Phone <ESC> P;60;11z <ESC> \
+Enable Keypad <ESC> P;60;20z <ESC> \
+Set Timeout <ESC> P;60;30;[number of seconds]z <ESC> \
+Tone Dial <ESC> P;60;40z text <ESC> \
+Pulse Dial <ESC> P;60;41z text <ESC> \
+On-hook Status (response) <ESC> P;70;0x <ESC> \
+Off-hook status (response) <ESC> P;70;1z <ESC> \
+Timeout status (response) <ESC> P;70;2z <ESC> \
+
+Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 ppG6-G9
+Status: DEC private; DECtalk
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: DCS 0 ; Ps2 ; Ps3 y FntRcrd ; CommentRecord ST
+Mnemonic: DECLFF
+Description: Load font file
+
+Ps2 Meaning
+0 Print summary sheet
+1 Don't print summary sheet
+
+Ps3 Meaning
+0 Delete all fonts
+1 Replace fonts with same ID
+
+FntRcrd = data for font set
+
+ComentRecord = user supplied text
+
+Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE109
+Status: DEC private; LA100, LN03
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: DCS Pfn ; Pcn ; Pe ; Pcms ; Pw ; Pt ; Pcmh ; Pcss {
+ Dscs Sxbp1 ; Sxbp2 ; ... ST
+Mnemonic: DECDLD
+Description: Down-line load DRCS characters
+
+Pfn;Pcn;Pe;Pcms;Pw;Pt are parameter characters, separated by
+semicolons, that define parameters described in Table 4-9. Valid
+values for Pcms, Pw, and Pt are: Pcms = 0, 2, 3 or 4; Pw = 0, 1 or 2;
+and Pt = 0 or 1. Invalid combinations are ignored. A font loaded for
+80 columns can be used in 132 columns and a font loaded for 132
+columns can be used in 80 columns.
+
+{ (7/11) is the final character that signals the end of the parameter
+characters and specifies a DECDLD function.
+
+Dscs defines the character set "name" for the soft font, and is used
+in the SCS (select character set) escape sequence.
+
+Sxbp1;Sxbp2;...;Sxbpn are sixel bit patterns (1 to 94 patterns) for
+characters separated by semicolons. Each sixel bit pattern has the
+form:
+
+ S...S/S...S
+
+where the first S...S represents the upper columns (sixels) of the
+DRCS character, the slash (2/5) advances the sixel pattern to the
+lower columns of the DRCS character, and the second S...S represents
+the lower columns (sixels) of the DRCS (see Figure 4-6).
+
+ST (9/12) is the string terminator. It is an 8-bit control character
+that you can also express as ESC \ (1/11 5/12) when coding for a 7-bit
+environment.
+
+Table 4-9 DECDLD Parameter Characters
+
+Parameter Name Description
+ Pfn Font Number Specifies DRCS font buffer to be loaded. The
+ VT220 has only one DRCS font
+ buffer. This parameter has two valid
+ values: 0 and 1.
+
+ Pcn Starting
+ Character
+ Number
+
+ Selects starting character in DRCS font
+ buffer to be loaded. For example:
+ Parameter value 1 specifies a column 2/row
+ 1 character, parameter 94 specifies
+ a column 7/row 14 character (Table 2-1 in
+ Chapter 2).
+
+ Pe Erase Control Selects which characters are erased before
+ loading according to:
+
+ 0 = erase all characters in this DRCS set
+ 1 = erase only the characters that are being
+ reloaded
+ 2 = erase all characters in all DRCS sets
+ (this font buffer number and
+ other font buffer numbers)
+
+ Pcms Character Matrix
+ Size Defines the expected limit of the character
+ matrix size according to:
+
+ 0 = Device default (7 x 10)
+ 1 = (not used)
+ 2 = 5 x 10
+ 3 = 6 x 10
+ 4 = 7 x 10
+ 5 = 5 x Pcmh
+ 6 = 6 x Pcmh
+ 7 = 7 x Pcmh
+ 8 = 8 x Pcmh
+ 9 = 9 x Pcmh
+ 10 = 10 x Pcmh
+
+ Pw Width Attribute Specifies the width attribute according to:
+
+ 0 = Device default (80 Columns)
+ 1 = 80 column
+ 2 = 132 column
+
+ Pt Text/ Full-Cell Allows software to treat the font as a text
+ font or a full-cell font according to:
+
+ 0 = Device default (text)
+ 1 = Text
+ 2 = Full-Cell (not used)
+
+ Full-Cell fonts can individually address
+ all pixels in a cell, while text fonts, in
+ general, may not be able to address all
+ pixels individually.
+
+ Pcmh Character Matrix Height
+ Sets the character matrix size in conjuction
+ with Pcms. The maximum is device-dependent.
+
+ Pcss Character-set size
+ 0 = 94 characters 1 = 96 characters
+
+[ The sixels have MSB at the bottom and an offset of 077 octal applied ]
+
+Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/docs/vt220-rm/chapter4.html>
+Status: DEC private; VT200
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: DCS 2000 ; Pterm ; Ptag { Ps ST
+Mnemonic: WRQCMD
+Description: Invoke a reflection command
+
+Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
+Status: WRQ private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: DCS ... | ... ST
+Mnemonic: DECUDK
+Description: User-defined keys
+
+Source: Paul Williams <paul@celigne.co.uk> in mail
+ <3844F164.F2242F18@rdel.co.uk>
+Status: DEC private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: DCS Ps1 ; Ps2 } IDstring ST
+Mnemonic: DECATFF
+Description: Assign to font file
+
+Ps1 Meaning
+1 Assign by font (default)
+2 Assign by font family
+
+Ps2 = font number for use with SGR
+
+IDstring = name associated with font number
+
+Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE108
+Status: DEC private; LA100, LN03
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: DCS Ps ! q ... ST
+Description: Enter GIDIS mode
+
+Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE126
+Status: DEC private; LCP01
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: DCS Ps ~ IDstring ST
+Mnemonic: DECDTFF
+Description: Delete type family or font file
+
+Ps1 Meaning
+0 IDstring is type family
+1 IDstring is font
+
+IDstring = 7 letter family name or 16 letter font ID
+
+Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE108
+Status: DEC private; LN03
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: DCS Pn ! u Ps ST
+Mnemonic: DECAUPSS
+Description: Assign user-preferred supplemental set
+
+Pn = 0 for 94-character, 1 for 96-character (?)
+Ps = character set specifier as passed to GZD4 and co. (?)
+
+Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
+Status: DEC private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: DCS Pn1 ; Pn2 ; Pn3 ! z Ps ST
+Mnemonic: DECDMAC
+
+You can define macros that are interpreted as normal input when
+emulating the VT420 terminal. Any macro definitions that do not fit
+into the memory allotted are ignored. An RIS or DECSR clears all macro
+definitions. A soft reset (DECSTR) has no effect.
+
+Pn1: Macro ID number (0-63). If you give a macro an ID number that
+already exists, the old macro definition is deleted and the new one is
+used. If <n1> exceeds 63, Reflection ignores this control
+function. Everything but the Csi 5i and Csi 4i control functions are
+passed to the printer.
+
+Pn2: Determine how a new macro definition is treated: If Pn2 is 0 or
+omitted, an old macro with the same macro ID number is deleted. If
+Pn2 is 1, DECDMAC deletes all current macro definitions before
+defining this macro. If <n2> is a number that is not 0 or 1, the macro
+is ignored.
+
+Pn3: Select the encoding format for the text of the macro definition:
+If Pn3 is 0 or omitted, ASCII text is used in the macro. If Pn3 is
+1, hex pairs are used (each pair of characters in the macro is the hex
+value for a single ASCII character. If Pn3 is a number that is not 0
+or 1, the macro is ignored. The string of text and control functions
+to be performed when the macro is invoked. If hex pairs are used, you
+can also use a repeat introducer (!) in Ps. The repeat introducer
+lets you repeat any hex pair in the definition string any number of
+times.
+
+Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
+Status: DEC private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: DCS ... ! | ... ST
+Mnemonic: DECRPTUI
+Description: Report Terminal Unit Information
+
+(to Host)
+
+Source: Paul Williams <paul@celigne.co.uk> in mail
+ <3844F164.F2242F18@rdel.co.uk>
+Status: DEC private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: DCS Pn ! ~ Ps ST
+Mnemonic: DECCKSR
+Description: Checksum response
+
+This is sent by the terminal in response to DECRQCRA or DSR ? 63. Ps
+is a four-digit hexadecimal checksum. Pn is the identifier given in
+the checksum request.
+
+Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
+Status: DEC private; VT400
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: DCS ... " { ... ST
+Mnemonic: DECFSR
+Description: Font Status Report
+
+Source: Paul Williams <paul@celigne.co.uk> in mail
+ <3844F164.F2242F18@rdel.co.uk>
+Status: DEC private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: DCS 1 $ p Ps ST
+Mnemonic: DECRSTS
+Description: Restore terminal state
+
+Sets terminal state. Ps should be a string returned by DECTSR.
+
+Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
+Status: DEC private; VT300
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: DCS 2 $ p Ps ST
+Mnemonic: DECRSTS
+Description: Restore color table
+
+Sets the color table. Ps is as specified under DECCTR.
+
+Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
+Status: DEC private; VT300
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: DCS $ q Ps ST
+Mnemonic: DECRQSS
+Description: Control function settings request
+
+This sequence is sent by the host to request the terminal to report
+the setting of a control function. The control function in question
+is specified by Ps, which is the intermediate (if any) and final bytes
+of the function's control sequence. The following values of Ps are
+supported:
+
+m => SGR
+r => DECSTBM
+$ | => DECSCPP
+$ } => DECSASD
+$ ~ => DECSSDT
+" p => DECSCL
+" q => DECSCA
+
+The terminal responds with DECRPSS. Only one control function may be
+queried at a time.
+
+Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
+Status: DEC private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: DCS Pn $ r Ps ST
+Mnemonic: DECRPSS
+Description: Control function settings response
+
+This sequence is returned by the terminal in response to DECRQSS.
+
+Pn is 0 if the request was invalid (e.g. for a function that can't be
+reported) or 1 if it was successful.
+
+Ps is the complete control sequence (minus the leading CSI) necessary
+to set the state of the requested control function.
+
+Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
+Status: DEC private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: DCS 1 $ s Ps ST
+Mnemonic: DECTSR
+Description: Terminal state report
+
+This is sent in response to a DECRQTSR, and contains an opaque
+representation of the terminal's state.
+
+Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
+Status: DEC private; VT300
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: DCS 2 $ s Ps ST
+Mnemonic: DECCTR
+Description: Color table report
+
+This is sent by the terminal in response to DECRQTSR. Ps contains the
+terminal's colour table. The palette entries are separated by slashes, and
+each one containe (semicolon-separated):
+
+Color ???
+Colour space (1 => HLS, 2 => RGB)
+Components (H;L;S or R;G;B)
+
+Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
+Status: DEC private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: DCS Ps $ t Ps ST
+Mnemonic: DECRSPS
+Description: Restore presentation state
+
+Ps is 1 to restore cursor information and 2 to restore tab stops. Ps is
+in the format returned by DECCIR or DECTABSR respectively.
+
+Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
+Status: DEC private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: DCS 1 $ u Pr ; Pc ; Pp ; Srend ; Satt ; Sflag ; Pgl ; Pgr ; Scss ;
+ Sdesig ST
+Mnemonic: DECCIR
+Description: Cursor information report
+
+See DECRQPSR for request.
+
+ * Response DCS 1 $ u Pr; Pc; Pp; Srend; Satt; Sflag; Pgl; Pgr; Scss; Sdesig ST
+ * where Pr is cursor row (counted from origin as 1,1)
+ * Pc is cursor column
+ * Pp is 1, video page, a constant for VT320s
+ * Srend = 40h + 8 (rev video on) + 4 (blinking on)
+ * + 2 (underline on) + 1 (bold on)
+ * Satt = 40h + 1 (selective erase on)
+ * Sflag = 40h + 8 (autowrap pending) + 4 (SS3 pending)
+ * + 2 (SS2 pending) + 1 (Origin mode on)
+ * Pgl = char set in GL (0 = G0, 1 = G1, 2 = G2, 3 = G3)
+ * Pgr = char set in GR (same as for Pgl)
+ * Scss = 40h + 8 (G3 is 96 char) + 4 (G2 is 96 char)
+ * + 2 (G1 is 96 char) + 1 (G0 is 96 char)
+ * Sdesig is string of character idents for sets G0...G3, with
+ * no separators between set idents.
+ * If NRCs are active the set idents (all 94 byte types) are:
+ * British A Italian Y
+ * Dutch 4 Norwegian/Danish ' (hex 60) or E or 6
+ * Finnish 5 or C Portuguese %6 or g or L
+ * French R or f Spanish Z
+ * French Canadian 9 or Q Swedish 7 or H
+ * German K Swiss =
+ * Hebrew %=
+ * (MS Kermit uses any choice when there are multiple)
+ */
+
+Source: vttest-990712 vt420.c
+Status: DEC private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: DCS 2 $ u Ps ST
+Mnemonic: DECTABSR
+Description: Tab stop report
+
+Sent by the terminal is response to a DECRQPSR.
+
+Ps is a slash-separated list of tab stops.
+
+Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
+Status: DEC private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: DCS Pc $ w Ky1 / Std1 / Stu1 ; ... ; Kyn / Stnd / Stnu ST
+Mnemonic: DECLKD (also DECLBD)
+Description: Locator key definition
+
+Pc - Clear parameter
+
+0 (or omitted) Clear all LKDs before loading new values. All button
+ definition strings are empty (not the default).
+1 Clear old definition only for keys that are redefined.
+
+Kyn / Stnd / Stnu - Key selection code n, slash delimeter, and string
+parameter n for down and up key transitions.
+
+Kyn is a single ASCII digit, and Std/Stu is a series of ASCII hex
+pairs. If Std or Stu is omitted, the corresponding button string will
+be empty. Key definition strings are delimited with a semicolon (";").
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt_mouse.html>
+Status: DEC private; VT340?
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: DCS Pn . y Ps ST
+Description: xwsh device control
+
+Device control string. Ps is a single ansi string (character codes in
+the range of octal 040 to 0176 inclusive). The following defines what
+the string is used for.
+
+1 Set the window title.
+3 Set the icon title.
+4 Set the text color by string. See the -C command for a description
+ of how the string will be interpreted.
+5 Set the page color by string.
+6 Set the selection text color by string.
+7 Set the selection page color by string.
+8 Set the cursor text color by string.
+9 Set the cursor page color by string.
+10 Set the half intensity color by string.
+11 Set the bold intensity color by string.
+101 Bind the string to the key named by Pn+1. The key numbers are the
+ same as the numbers defined in <device.h>. The string can contain
+ C style backslashed characters to get control characters into the
+ string. When the key is pressed the value will be sent to the
+ process that xwsh is managing. This capability is turned off by
+ default for security. Turn it on with the "-bindkey2dcs" command
+ line option or with the "bindKey2DCS" resource.
+103 Bind the string to the key named by Pn+1. The key numbers are the
+ same as the numbers defined in <device.h>. When the key is pressed
+ the value will be used to invoke a function internal to xwsh. This
+ capability is turned off by default for security. Turn it on with
+ the "-bindkey2dcs" command line option or with the "bindKey2DCS"
+ resource.
+
+Source: IRIX 6.5.5 xwsh(1G)
+Status: SGI private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: PU1 or ESC Q
+Mnemonic: PU1
+Description: Private use one
+
+PU1 is reserved for a function without standardized meaning for
+private use as required, subject to the prior agreement between the
+sender and the recipient of the data.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.100
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: PU2 or ESC R
+Mnemonic: PU2
+Description: Private use two
+
+PU2 is reserved for a function without standardized meaning for
+private use as required, subject to the prior agreement between the
+sender and the recipient of the data.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.101
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: STS or ESC S
+Mnemonic: STS
+Description: Set transmit state
+
+STS is used to establish the transmit state in the receiving
+device. In this state the transmission of data from the device is
+possible.
+
+The actual initiation of transmission of data is performed by a data
+communication or input/output interface control procedure which is
+outside the scope of this Standard.
+
+The transmit state is established either by STS appearing in the
+received data stream or by the operation of an appropriate key on a
+keyboard.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.145
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CCH or ESC T
+Mnemonic: CCH
+Description: Cancel character
+
+CCH is used to indicate that both the preceding graphic character in
+the data stream, (represented by one or more bit combinations)
+including SPACE, and the control function CCH itself are to be ignored
+for further interpretation of the data stream.
+
+If the character preceding CCH in the data stream is a control
+function (represented by one or more bit combinations), the effect of
+CCH is not defined by this Standard.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.8
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: MW or ESC U
+Mnemonic: MW
+Description: Message waiting
+
+MW is used to set a message waiting indicator in the receiving
+device. An appropriate acknowledgement to the receipt of MW may be
+given by using DEVICE STATUS REPORT (DSR).
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.83
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: SPA or ESC V
+Mnemonic: SPA
+Description: Start of guarded area
+
+SPA is used to indicate that the active presentation position is the
+first of a string of character positions in the presentation
+component, the contents of which are protected against manual
+alteration, are guarded against transmission or transfer, depending on
+the setting of the GUARDED AREA TRANSFER MODE (GATM) and may be
+protected against erasure, depending on the setting of the ERASURE
+MODE (ERM). The end of this string is indicated by END OF GUARDED AREA
+(EPA).
+
+NOTE
+The control functions for area definition (DAQ, EPA, ESA, SPA, SSA)
+should not be used within an SRS string or an SDS string.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.129
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: EPA or ESC W
+Mnemonic: EPA
+Description: End of guarded area
+
+EPA is used to indicate that the active presentation position is the
+last of a string of character positions in the presentation component,
+the contents of which are protected against manual alteration, are
+guarded against transmission or transfer, depending on the setting of
+the GUARDED AREA TRANSFER MODE (GATM), and may be protected against
+erasure, depending on the setting of the ERASURE MODE (ERM). The
+beginning of this string is indicated by START OF GUARDED AREA (SPA).
+
+NOTE
+The control functions for area definition (DAQ, EPA, ESA, SPA, SSA)
+should not be used within an SRS string or an SDS string.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.46
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: SOS or ESC X
+Mnemonic: SOS
+Description: Start of string
+
+SOS is used as the opening delimiter of a control string. The
+character string following may consist of any bit combination, except
+those representing SOS or STRING TERMINATOR (ST). The control string
+is closed by the terminating delimiter STRING TERMINATOR (ST). The
+interpretation of the character string depends on the application.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.128
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: SCI or ESC Z
+Mnemonic: SCI
+Description: Single character introducer
+
+SCI and the bit combination following it are used to represent a
+control function or a graphic character. The bit combination
+following SCI must be from 00/08 to 00/13 or 02/00 to 07/14. The use
+of SCI is reserved for future standardization.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.109
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI or ESC [
+Mnemonic: CSI
+Description: Control sequence introducer
+
+CSI is used as the first character of a control sequence.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.16
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn @
+Mnemonic: ICH
+Description: Insert character
+
+Parameter default value: Pn = 1
+
+If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to PRESENTATION, ICH
+is used to prepare the insertion of n characters, by putting into the
+erased state the active presentation position and, depending on the
+setting of the CHARACTER EDITING MODE (HEM), the n-1 preceding or
+following character positions in the presentation component, where n
+equals the value of Pn. The previous contents of the active
+presentation position and an adjacent string of character positions
+are shifted away from the active presentation position. The contents
+of n character positions at the other end of the shifted part are
+removed. The active presentation position is moved to the line home
+position in the active line. The line home position is established by
+the parameter value of SET LINE HOME (SLH).
+
+The extent of the shifted part is established by SELECT EDITING EXTENT
+(SEE).
+
+The effect of ICH on the start or end of a selected area, the start or
+end of a qualified area, or a tabulation stop in the shifted part, is
+not defined by this Standard.
+
+If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to DATA, ICH is used
+to prepare the insertion of n characters, by putting into the erased
+state the active data position and, depending on the setting of the
+CHARACTER EDITING MODE (HEM), the n-1 preceding or following character
+positions in the data component, where n equals the value of Pn. The
+previous contents of the active data position and an adjacent string
+of character positions are shifted away from the active data
+position. The contents of n character positions at the other end of
+the shifted part are removed. The active data position is moved to the
+line home position in the active line. The line home position is
+established by the parameter value of SET LINE HOME (SLH).
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.64
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn A
+Mnemonic: CUU
+Description: Cursor up
+
+Parameter default value: Pn = 1
+
+CUU causes the active presentation position to be moved upwards in the
+presentation component by n line positions if the character path is
+horizontal, or by n character positions if the character path is
+vertical, where n equals the value of Pn.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.22
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI = Pc A
+Mnemonic: SBC
+Description: set border color
+
+Set the overscan (border) to the color specified.
+
+0 => black 8 => grey
+1 => blue 9 => light blue
+2 => green 10 => light green
+3 => cyan 11 => light cyan
+4 => red 12 => light red
+5 => magenta 13 => light magenta
+6 => brown 14 => yellow
+7 => white 15 => light white
+
+Source: OpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW)
+Status: SCO private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn B
+Mnemonic: CUD
+Description: Cursor down
+
+Parameter default value: Pn = 1
+
+CUD causes the active presentation position to be moved downwards in
+the presentation component by n line positions if the character path
+is horizontal, or by n character positions if the character path is
+vertical, where n equals the value of Pn.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.19
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI = Pn1 ; Pn2 B
+Mnemonic: SBP
+Description: Set bell parameters
+
+Sets bell parameters (where Pn1 is the pitch in Hz and Pn2 is the
+duration in milliseconds)
+
+Source: UnixWare 7 display(7)
+
+Set the frequency (Pn1) and duration (Pn2) of the audible bell. The
+frequency is in units of 840.3 nanoseconds, and the duration is in
+units of 100 milliseconds.
+
+Source: OpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW)
+Status: iBCS2 private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn C
+Mnemonic: CUF
+Description: Cursor right
+
+Parameter default value: Pn = 1
+
+CUF causes the active presentation position to be moved rightwards in
+the presentation component by n character positions if the character
+path is horizontal, or by n line positions if the character path is
+vertical, where n equals the value of Pn.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.20
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI = Pn1 ; Pn2 C
+Description: Set cursor parameters
+
+Sets cursor parameters (where Pn1 is the starting and Pn2 is the
+ending scanlines of the cursor).
+
+Source: UnixWare 7 display(7)
+Status: SCO private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn D
+Mnemonic: CUB
+Description: Cursor left
+
+Parameter default value: Pn = 1
+
+CUB causes the active presentation position to be moved leftwards in
+the presentation component by n character positions if the character
+path is horizontal, or by n line positions if the character path is
+vertical, where n equals the value of Pn.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.18
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI = Ps D
+Mnemonic: SBI
+Description: Set background intensity
+
+Turns the intensity of background colors on (Ps = 1) or off (Ps = 0).
+Any characters printed with the ``blink'' attribute modifier will
+instead be displayed as having an intense background.
+
+Source: OpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW)
+Status: SCO private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn E
+Mnemonic: CNL
+Description: Cursor next line
+
+Parameter default value: Pn = 1
+
+CNL causes the active presentation position to be moved to the first
+character position of the n-th following line in the presentation
+component, where n equals the value of Pn.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.12
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI = Ps E
+Mnemonic: SBB
+Description: Set background blink bit
+
+Sets (Ps = 1) or clears (Ps = 0) the Blink versus Bold background bit
+in the M6845 CRT controller. The parameters are the exact inverse of
+the SBI sequence above. Other than that, they behave the same on the
+console. In GUI versions of scoansi, the application may distinguish
+between these two sequences.
+
+Source: OpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW)
+Status: SCO private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn F
+Mnemonic: CPL
+Description: Cursor preceding line
+
+Parameter default value: Pn = 1
+
+CPL causes the active presentation position to be moved to the first
+character position of the n-th preceding line in the presentation
+component, where n equals the value of Pn.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.13
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI = Pc F
+Mnemonic: SNF
+Description: set normal foreground color
+
+Sets normal foreground color according to Pc:
+
+0 => black 8 => grey
+1 => blue 9 => light blue
+2 => green 10 => light green
+3 => cyan 11 => light cyan
+4 => red 12 => light red
+5 => magenta 13 => light magenta
+6 => brown 14 => yellow
+7 => white 15 => light white
+
+Source: UnixWare 7 display(7)
+
+Csi =<n>F Set the default normal foreground color to <n>.
+This sequence also sets the current color to <n>.
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/color_control_news.txt>
+Status: SCO private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn G
+Mnemonic: CHA
+Description: Cursor character absolute
+
+Parameter default value: Pn = 1
+
+CHA causes the active presentation position to be moved to character
+position n in the active line in the presentation component, where n
+equals the value of Pn.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.5.9
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI = Pc G
+Mnemonic: SNB
+Description: set normal background color
+
+Sets normal background color according to Pc:
+
+0 => black 8 => grey
+1 => blue 9 => light blue
+2 => green 10 => light green
+3 => cyan 11 => light cyan
+4 => red 12 => light red
+5 => magenta 13 => light magenta
+6 => brown 14 => yellow
+7 => white 15 => light white
+
+Source: UnixWare 7 display(7)
+
+Csi =<n>G Set the default normal background color to <n>.
+This sequence also sets the current color to <n>.
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/color_control_news.txt>
+Status: SCO private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn1 ; Pn2 H
+Mnemonic: CUP
+Description: Cursor position
+
+Parameter default values: Pn1 = 1; Pn2 = 1
+
+CUP causes the active presentation position to be moved in the
+presentation component to the n-th line position according to the line
+progression and to the m-th character position according to the
+character path, where n equals the value of Pn1 and m equals the value
+of Pn2.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.21
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI = Pc H
+Mnemonic: SRF
+Description: set reverse foreground color
+
+Sets reverse foreground color according to Pc:
+
+0 => black 8 => grey
+1 => blue 9 => light blue
+2 => green 10 => light green
+3 => cyan 11 => light cyan
+4 => red 12 => light red
+5 => magenta 13 => light magenta
+6 => brown 14 => yellow
+7 => white 15 => light white
+
+Source: UnixWare 7 display(7)
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/color_control_news.txt>
+Status: SCO private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn I
+Mnemonic: CHT
+Description: Cursor forward tabulation
+
+Parameter default value: Pn = 1
+
+CHT causes the active presentation position to be moved to the
+character position corresponding to the n-th following character
+tabulation stop in the presentation component, according to the
+character path, where n equals the value of Pn.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.5.10
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI = Pc I
+Mnemonic: SRB
+Description: set reverse background color
+
+Sets reverse background color according to Pc:
+
+0 => black 8 => grey
+1 => blue 9 => light blue
+2 => green 10 => light green
+3 => cyan 11 => light cyan
+4 => red 12 => light red
+5 => magenta 13 => light magenta
+6 => brown 14 => yellow
+7 => white 15 => light white
+
+Source: UnixWare 7 display(7)
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/color_control_news.txt>
+Status: SCO private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI = ? I
+Description: Screen saver off
+
+Source: jaltman@watsun.cc.columbia.edu (Jeffrey Altman) in comp.terminals
+ <7t2fe1$gj0$1@newsmaster.cc.columbia.edu>
+Status: BA80 private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps J
+Mnemonic: ED
+Description: Erase in page
+
+Parameter default value: Ps = 0
+
+If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to PRESENTATION, ED
+causes some or all character positions of the active page (the page
+which contains the active presentation position in the presentation
+component) to be put into the erased state, depending on the parameter
+values:
+
+0 the active presentation position and the character positions up to
+ the end of the page are put into the erased state
+
+1 the character positions from the beginning of the page up to and
+ including the active presentation position are put into the erased
+ state
+
+2 all character positions of the page are put into the erased state
+
+If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to DATA, ED causes
+some or all character positions of the active page (the page which
+contains the active data position in the data component) to be put
+into the erased state, depending on the parameter values:
+
+0 the active data position and the character positions up to the end
+ of the page are put into the erased state
+
+1 the character positions from the beginning of the page up to and
+ including the active data position are put into the erased state
+
+2 all character positions of the page are put into the erased state
+
+Whether the character positions of protected areas are put into the
+erased state, or the character positions of unprotected areas only,
+depends on the setting of the ERASURE MODE (ERM).
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.39
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI = Pc J
+Mnemonic: SGF
+Description: Set graphic foreground color
+
+Sets graphic foreground color according to Pc:
+
+0 => black 8 => grey
+1 => blue 9 => light blue
+2 => green 10 => light green
+3 => cyan 11 => light cyan
+4 => red 12 => light red
+5 => magenta 13 => light magenta
+6 => brown 14 => yellow
+7 => white 15 => light white
+
+Source: UnixWare 7 display(7)
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/color_control_news.txt>
+Status: SCO private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI ? Ps J
+Mnemonic: DECSED
+Description: Selective erase in display
+
+Parameter default value: Ps = 0
+
+Depending on the value of Ps:
+
+0 Erases all "erasable" characters (DECSCA) from and including the
+ cursor to the end of the screen. Does not affect video line attributes
+ or video character attributes (SGR).
+
+1 Erases all "erasable" characters (DECSCA) from the beginning of the
+ screen to and including the cursor. Does not affect video line
+ attributes or video character attributes (SGR).
+
+2 Erases all "erasable" characters (DECSCA) in the entire display. Does
+ not affect video character attributes or video line attributes (SGR).
+
+Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/docs/vt220-rm/chapter4.html>
+Status: DEC private; VT200
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI ? = J
+Description: Screen saver on
+
+Source: jaltman@watsun.cc.columbia.edu (Jeffrey Altman) in comp.terminals
+ <7t2fe1$gj0$1@newsmaster.cc.columbia.edu>
+Status: BA80 private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps K
+Mnemonic: EL
+Description: Erase in line
+
+Parameter default value: Ps = 0
+
+If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to PRESENTATION, EL
+causes some or all character positions of the active line (the line
+which contains the active presentation position in the presentation
+component) to be put into the erased state, depending on the parameter
+values:
+
+0 the active presentation position and the character positions up to
+ the end of the line are put into the erased state
+
+1 the character positions from the beginning of the line up to and
+ including the active presentation position are put into the erased
+ state
+
+2 all character positions of the line are put into the erased state
+
+If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to DATA, EL causes
+some or all character positions of the active line (the line which
+contains the active data position in the data component) to be put
+into the erased state, depending on the parameter values:
+
+0 the active data position and the character positions up to the end
+ of the line are put into the erased state
+
+1 the character positions from the beginning of the line up to and
+ including the active data position are put into the erased state
+
+2 all character positions of the line are put into the erased state
+
+Whether the character positions of protected areas are put into the
+erased state, or the character positions of unprotected areas only,
+depends on the setting of the ERASURE MODE (ERM).
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.41
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI = Pc K
+Mnemonic: SGB
+Description: set graphic background color
+
+Sets graphic background color according to Pc:
+
+0 => black 8 => grey
+1 => blue 9 => light blue
+2 => green 10 => light green
+3 => cyan 11 => light cyan
+4 => red 12 => light red
+5 => magenta 13 => light magenta
+6 => brown 14 => yellow
+7 => white 15 => light white
+
+Source: UnixWare 7 display(7)
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/color_control_news.txt>
+Status: SCO private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI ? Ps K
+Mnemonic: DECSEL
+Description: Selective erase in line
+
+Parameter default value: Ps = 0
+
+Depending on the value of Ps:
+
+0 Erases all "erasable" characters (DECSCA) from the cursor to the end
+ of the line. Does not affect video line attributes or video character
+ attributes (SGR).
+
+1 Erases all "erasable" characters (DECSCA) from the beginning of the
+ line to and including the cursor position. Does not affect video line
+ attributes or video character attributes.
+
+2 Erases all "erasable" characters (DECSCA) on the line. Does not
+ affect video line attributes or video character attributes.
+
+Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/docs/vt220-rm/chapter4.html>
+Status: DEC private; VT200
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn L
+Mnemonic: IL
+Description: Insert line
+
+Parameter default value: Pn = 1
+
+If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to PRESENTATION, IL
+is used to prepare the insertion of n lines, by putting into the
+erased state in the presentation component the active line (the line
+that contains the active presentation position) and, depending on the
+setting of the LINE EDITING MODE (VEM), the n-1 preceding or following
+lines, where n equals the value of Pn. The previous contents of the
+active line and of adjacent lines are shifted away from the active
+line. The contents of n lines at the other end of the shifted part are
+removed. The active presentation position is moved to the line home
+position in the active line. The line home position is established by
+the parameter value of SET LINE HOME (SLH).
+
+The extent of the shifted part is established by SELECT EDITING EXTENT
+(SEE).
+
+Any occurrences of the start or end of a selected area, the start or
+end of a qualified area, or a tabulation stop in the shifted part, are
+also shifted.
+
+If the TABULATION STOP MODE (TSM) is set to SINGLE, character
+tabulation stops are cleared in the lines that are put into the erased
+state.
+
+If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to DATA, IL is used
+to prepare the insertion of n lines, by putting into the erased state
+in the data component the active line (the line that contains the
+active data position) and, depending on the setting of the LINE
+EDITING MODE (VEM), the n-1 preceding or following lines, where n
+equals the value of Pn. The previous contents of the active line and
+of adjacent lines are shifted away from the active line. The contents
+of n lines at the other end of the shifted part are removed. The
+active data position is moved to the line home position in the active
+line. The line home position is established by the parameter value of
+SET LINE HOME (SLH).
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.67
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI = Ps L
+Mnemonic: SEF
+Description: Set emulator feature
+
+ Control the various emulator features. Parameter Ps indicates the
+ action to be taken:
+
+ ----------------------------------------------------------------
+ Value Meaning
+ ----------------------------------------------------------------
+ 0 New regions filled with the current attribute (default)
+ 1 New regions filled with the normal attribute
+ 2 Disable iBCS2 compliance (default)
+ 3 Enable iBCS2 compliance
+ 4 Disable ANSI SGR0 interpretation (default)
+ 5 Enable ANSI SGR0 interpretation
+ 6 Disable backwards compatibility mode (default)
+ 7 Enable backwards compatibility mode (resets margins too)
+ 8 Cursor motion bound by region (default)
+ 9 Cursor motion unbound
+ 10 Enable 8-bit keyboard meta mode (default)
+ 11 Disable 8-bit keyboard meta mode
+ 12 Disable debugging for this screen (default)
+ 13 Enable debugging for this screen (do not use)
+ 14 Disable global video loop debugging (default)
+ 15 Enable global video loop debugging (do not use)
+ 16 Enable M6845 frame buffer optimization (default)
+ 17 Disable M6845 frame buffer optimization (debugging only)
+ 20 Disable using ESC for meta (high) bit.
+ 21 Enable using ESC for meta (high) bit.
+
+Source: OpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW)
+Status: SCO private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn M
+Mnemonic: DL
+Description: Delete line
+
+Parameter default value: Pn = 1
+
+If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to PRESENTATION, DL
+causes the contents of the active line (the line that contains the
+active presentation position) and, depending on the setting of the
+LINE EDITING MODE (VEM), the contents of the n-1 preceding or
+following lines to be removed from the presentation component, where n
+equals the value of Pn. The resulting gap is closed by shifting the
+contents of a number of adjacent lines towards the active line. At the
+other end of the shifted part, n lines are put into the erased state.
+
+The active presentation position is moved to the line home position in
+the active line. The line home position is established by the
+parameter value of SET LINE HOME (SLH). If the TABULATION STOP MODE
+(TSM) is set to SINGLE, character tabulation stops are cleared in the
+lines that are put into the erased state.
+
+The extent of the shifted part is established by SELECT EDITING EXTENT (SEE).
+
+Any occurrences of the start or end of a selected area, the start or
+end of a qualified area, or a tabulation stop in the shifted part, are
+also shifted.
+
+If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to DATA, DL causes
+the contents of the active line (the line that contains the active
+data position) and, depending on the setting of the LINE EDITING MODE
+(VEM), the contents of the n-1 preceding or following lines to be
+removed from the data component, where n equals the value of Pn. The
+resulting gap is closed by shifting the contents of a number of
+adjacent lines towards the active line. At the other end of the
+shifted part, n lines are put into the erased state. The active data
+position is moved to the line home position in the active line. The
+line home position is established by the parameter value of SET LINE
+HOME (SLH).
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.32
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI = Ps M
+Mnemonic: RAS
+Description: Return attribute setting
+
+ Use this sequence to return the current settings for the attribute
+ type specified by Ps. Attributes are returned via the keyboard data
+ input stream as text decimal numbers separated by a space and
+ terminated with a newline. The attribute values returned use the ISO
+ color numbering scheme. For example, if the current normal attribute
+ setting is bright yellow on a blue background, CSI = 0 M would return
+ ``14 1\n''. Ps can be one of the following values:
+
+ ---------------------------------------------------------------
+ Value Meaning
+ ---------------------------------------------------------------
+ 0 Return the current normal attribute setting
+ 1 Return the current reverse video attribute setting
+ 2 Return the current graphic character attribute setting
+
+Colour are:
+0 => black 8 => grey
+1 => blue 9 => light blue
+2 => green 10 => light green
+3 => cyan 11 => light cyan
+4 => red 12 => light red
+5 => magenta 13 => light magenta
+6 => brown 14 => yellow
+7 => white 15 => light white
+
+Source: OpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW)
+Status: SCO private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps N
+Mnemonic: EF
+Description: Erase in field
+
+Parameter default value: Ps = 0
+
+If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to PRESENTATION, EF
+causes some or all character positions of the active field (the field
+which contains the active presentation position in the presentation
+component) to be put into the erased state, depending on the parameter
+values:
+
+0 the active presentation position and the character positions up to
+ the end of the field are put into the erased state
+
+1 the character positions from the beginning of the field up to and
+ including the active presentation position are put into the erased
+ state
+
+2 all character positions of the field are put into the erased state
+
+If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to DATA, EF causes
+some or all character positions of the active field (the field which
+contains the active data position in the data component) to be put
+into the erased state, depending on the parameter values:
+
+0 the active data position and the character positions up to the end
+ of the field are put into the erased state
+
+1 the character positions from the beginning of the field up to and
+ including the active data position are put into the erased state
+
+2 all character positions of the field are put into the erased state
+
+Whether the character positions of protected areas are put into the
+erased state, or the character positions of unprotected areas only,
+depends on the setting of the ERASURE MODE (ERM).
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.40
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps O
+Mnemonic: EA
+Description Erase in area
+
+Parameter default value: Ps = 0
+
+If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to PRESENTATION, EA
+causes some or all character positions in the active qualified area
+(the qualified area in the presentation component which contains the
+active presentation position) to be put into the erased state,
+depending on the parameter values:
+
+0 the active presentation position and the character positions up to
+ the end of the qualified area are put into the erased state
+
+1 the character positions from the beginning of the qualified area up
+ to and including the active presentation position are put into the
+ erased state
+
+2 all character positions of the qualified area are put into the
+ erased state
+
+If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to DATA, EA causes
+some or all character positions in the active qualified area (the
+qualified area in the data component which contains the active data
+position) to be put into the erased state, depending on the parameter
+values:
+
+0 the active data position and the character positions up to the end
+ of the qualified area are put into the erased state
+
+1 the character positions from the beginning of the qualified area up
+ to and including the active data position are put into the erased
+ state
+
+2 all character positions of the qualified area are put into the
+ erased state
+
+Whether the character positions of protected areas are put into the
+erased state, or the character positions of unprotected areas only,
+depends on the setting of the ERASURE MODE (ERM).
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.37
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn P
+Mnemonic: DCH
+Description: Delete character
+
+Parameter default value: Pn = 1
+
+If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to PRESENTATION, DCH
+causes the contents of the active presentation position and, depending
+on the setting of the CHARACTER EDITING MODE (HEM), the contents of
+the n-1 preceding or following character positions to be removed from
+the presentation component, where n equals the value of Pn. The
+resulting gap is closed by shifting the contents of the adjacent
+character positions towards the active presentation position. At the
+other end of the shifted part, n character positions are put into the
+erased state.
+
+The extent of the shifted part is established by SELECT EDITING EXTENT (SEE).
+
+The effect of DCH on the start or end of a selected area, the start or
+end of a qualified area, or a tabulation stop in the shifted part is
+not defined by this Standard.
+
+If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to DATA, DCH causes
+the contents of the active data position and, depending on the setting
+of the CHARACTER EDITING MODE (HEM), the contents of the n-1 preceding
+or following character positions to be removed from the data
+component, where n equals the value of Pn. The resulting gap is closed
+by shifting the contents of the adjacent character positions towards
+the active data position. At the other end of the shifted part, n
+character positions are put into the erased state.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.26
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps Q
+Mnemonic: SEE
+Description: Select editing extent
+
+Parameter default value: Ps = 0
+
+SEE is used to establish the editing extent for subsequent character
+or line insertion or deletion. The established extent remains in
+effect until the next occurrence of SEE in the data stream. The
+editing extent depends on the parameter value:
+
+0 the shifted part is limited to the active page in the presentation
+component
+
+1 the shifted part is limited to the active line in the presentation
+component
+
+2 the shifted part is limited to the active field in the presentation
+component
+
+3 the shifted part is limited to the active qualified area
+
+4 the shifted part consists of the relevant part of the entire
+presentation component.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.115
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn1 ; Pn2 R
+Mnemonic: CPR
+Description: Active position report
+
+Parameter default values: Pn1 = 1; Pn2 = 1
+
+If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to PRESENTATION, CPR
+is used to report the active presentation position of the sending
+device as residing in the presentation component at the n-th line
+position according to the line progression and at the m-th character
+position according to the character path, where n equals the value of
+Pn1 and m equals the value of Pn2.
+
+If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to DATA, CPR is used
+to report the active data position of the sending device as residing
+in the data component at the n-th line position according to the line
+progression and at the m-th character position according to the
+character progression, where n equals the value of Pn1 and m equals
+the value of Pn2.
+
+CPR may be solicited by a DEVICE STATUS REPORT (DSR) or be sent
+unsolicited.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.14
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn S
+Mnemonic: SU
+Description: Scroll up
+
+Parameter default value: Pn = 1
+
+SU causes the data in the presentation component to be moved by n line
+positions if the line orientation is horizontal, or by n character
+positions if the line orientation is vertical, such that the data
+appear to move up; where n equals the value of Pn.
+
+The active presentation position is not affected by this control
+function.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.147
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn T
+Mnemonic: SD
+Description: Scroll down
+
+Parameter default value: Pn = 1
+
+SD causes the data in the presentation component to be moved by n line
+positions if the line orientation is horizontal, or by n character
+positions if the line orientation is vertical, such that the data
+appear to move down; where n equals the value of Pn.
+
+The active presentation position is not affected by this control
+function.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.113
+
+[ NB: that paragraph of the standard erroneously claims SD is CSI Pn ^. ]
+
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn1 ; Pn2 ; Pn3 ; Pn4 ; Pn5 T
+Description: Initiate hilite mouse tracking
+
+Source: XFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05
+Status: xterm private; clashes with ECMA-48
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn U
+Mnemonic: NP
+Description: Next page
+
+Parameter default value: Pn = 1
+
+NP causes the n-th following page in the presentation component to be
+displayed, where n equals the value of Pn.
+
+The effect of this control function on the active presentation
+position is not defined by this Standard.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.87
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn V
+Mnemonic: PP
+Description: Preceding page
+
+Parameter default value: Pn = 1
+
+PP causes the n-th preceding page in the presentation component to be
+displayed, where n equals the value of Pn. The effect of this control
+function on the active presentation position is not defined by this
+Standard.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.95
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps ... W
+Mnemonic: CTC
+Description: Cursor tabulation control
+
+Parameter default value: Ps = 0
+
+CTC causes one or more tabulation stops to be set or cleared in the
+presentation component, depending on the parameter values:
+
+0 a character tabulation stop is set at the active presentation position
+1 a line tabulation stop is set at the active line (the line that
+ contains the active presentation position)
+2 the character tabulation stop at the active presentation position is
+ cleared
+3 the line tabulation stop at the active line is cleared
+4 all character tabulation stops in the active line are cleared
+5 all character tabulation stops are cleared
+6 all line tabulation stops are cleared
+
+In the case of parameter values 0, 2 or 4 the number of lines affected
+depends on the setting of the TABULATION STOP MODE (TSM).
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.17
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn X
+Mnemonic: ECH
+Description: Erase character
+
+Parameter default value: Pn = 1
+
+If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to PRESENTATION, ECH
+causes the active presentation position and the n-1 following
+character positions in the presentation component to be put into the
+erased state, where n equals the value of Pn.
+
+If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to DATA, ECH causes
+the active data position and the n-1 following character positions in
+the data component to be put into the erased state, where n equals the
+value of Pn.
+
+Whether the character positions of protected areas are put into the
+erased state, or the character positions of unprotected areas only,
+depends on the setting of the ERASURE MODE (ERM).
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.38
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn Y
+Mnemonic: CVT
+Description: Cursor line tabulation
+
+Parameter default value: Pn = 1
+
+CVT causes the active presentation position to be moved to the
+corresponding character position of the line corresponding to the n-th
+following line tabulation stop in the presentation component, where n
+equals the value of Pn.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 8.3.23
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn Z
+Mnemonic: CBT
+Description: Cursor backward tabulation
+
+Parameter default value: Pn = 1
+
+CBT causes the active presentation position to be moved to the
+character position corresponding to the n-th preceding character
+tabulation stop in the presentation component, according to the
+character path, where n equals the value of Pn.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.7
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps [
+Mnemonic: SRS
+Description: Start reversed string
+
+Parameter default value: Ps = 0
+
+SRS is used to establish in the data component the beginning and the
+end of a string of characters as well as the direction of the
+string. This direction is opposite to that currently established. The
+indicated string follows the preceding text. The established character
+progression is not affected.
+
+The beginning of a reversed string is indicated by SRS with a
+parameter value of 1. A reversed string may contain one or more nested
+strings. These nested strings may be reversed strings the beginnings
+of which are indicated by SRS with a parameter value of 1, or directed
+strings the beginnings of which are indicated by START DIRECTED STRING
+(SDS) with a parameter value not equal to 0. Every beginning of such a
+string invokes the next deeper level of nesting.
+
+This Standard does not define the location of the active data position
+within any such nested string.
+
+The end of a reversed string is indicated by SRS with a parameter
+value of 0. Every end of such a string re-establishes the next higher
+level of nesting (the one in effect prior to the string just
+ended). The direction is re-established to that in effect prior to the
+string just ended. The active data position is moved to the character
+position following the characters of the string just ended.
+
+The parameter values are:
+
+0 end of a reversed string; re-establish the previous direction
+1 beginning of a reversed string; reverse the direction.
+
+NOTE 1
+The effect of receiving a CVT, HT, SCP, SPD or VT control function
+within an SRS string is not defined by this Standard.
+
+NOTE 2
+The control functions for area definition (DAQ, EPA, ESA, SPA, SSA)
+should not be used within an SRS string.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.137
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI [
+Description: Ignore next character
+
+However, after CSI [ (or ESC [ [) a single character is read and this
+entire sequence is ignored. (The idea is to ignore an echoed function
+key.)
+
+Source: Linux console_codes(4)
+Status: Linux private; clashes with ECMA-48 SRS
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps \
+Mnemonic: PTX
+Description: Parallel texts
+
+Parameter default value: Ps = 0
+
+PTX is used to delimit strings of graphic characters that are
+communicated one after another in the data stream but that are
+intended to be presented in parallel with one another, usually in
+adjacent lines.
+
+The parameter values are
+
+0 end of parallel texts
+1 beginning of a string of principal parallel text
+2 beginning of a string of supplementary parallel text
+3 beginning of a string of supplementary Japanese phonetic annotation
+4 beginning of a string of supplementary Chinese phonetic annotation
+5 end of a string of supplementary phonetic annotations
+
+PTX with a parameter value of 1 indicates the beginning of the string
+of principal text intended to be presented in parallel with one or
+more strings of supplementary text. PTX with a parameter value of 2,
+3 or 4 indicates the beginning of a string of supplementary text that
+is intended to be presented in parallel with either a string of
+principal text or the immediately preceding string of supplementary
+text, if any; at the same time it indicates the end of the preceding
+string of principal text or of the immediately preceding string of
+supplementary text, if any. The end of a string of supplementary text
+is indicated by a subsequent occurrence of PTX with a parameter value
+other than 1.
+
+PTX with a parameter value of 0 indicates the end of the strings of
+text intended to be presented in parallel with one another.
+
+NOTE
+
+PTX does not explicitly specify the relative placement of the strings
+of principal and supplementary parallel texts, or the relative sizes
+of graphic characters in the strings of parallel text. A string of
+supplementary text is normally presented in a line adjacent to the
+line containing the string of principal text, or adjacent to the line
+containing the immediately preceding string of supplementary text, if
+any. The first graphic character of the string of principal text and
+the first graphic character of a string of supplementary text are
+normally presented in the same position of their respective lines.
+However, a string of supplementary text longer (when presented) than
+the associated string of principal text may be centred on that
+string. In the case of long strings of text, such as paragraphs in
+different languages, the strings may be presented in successive lines
+in parallel columns, with their beginnings aligned with one another
+and the shorter of the paragraphs followed by an appropriate amount of
+"white space".
+
+Japanese phonetic annotation typically consists of a few half-size or
+smaller Kana characters which indicate the pronunciation or
+interpretation of one or more Kanji characters and are presented above
+those Kanji characters if the character path is horizontal, or to the
+right of them if the character path is vertical.
+
+Chinese phonetic annotation typically consists of a few Pinyin
+characters which indicate the pronunciation of one or more Hanzi
+characters and are presented above those Hanzi characters.
+Alternatively, the Pinyin characters may be presented in the same line
+as the Hanzi characters and following the respective Hanzi
+characters. The Pinyin characters will then be presented within
+enclosing pairs of parentheses.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.99
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps ]
+Mnemonic: SDS
+Description: Start directed string
+
+Parameter default value: Ps = 0
+
+SDS is used to establish in the data component the beginning and the
+end of a string of characters as well as the direction of the
+string. This direction may be different from that currently
+established. The indicated string follows the preceding text. The
+established character progression is not affected.
+
+The beginning of a directed string is indicated by SDS with a
+parameter value not equal to 0. A directed string may contain one or
+more nested strings. These nested strings may be directed strings the
+beginnings of which are indicated by SDS with a parameter value not
+equal to 0, or reversed strings the beginnings of which are indicated
+by START REVERSED STRING (SRS) with a parameter value of 1. Every
+beginning of such a string invokes the next deeper level of nesting.
+
+This Standard does not define the location of the active data position
+within any such nested string.
+
+The end of a directed string is indicated by SDS with a parameter
+value of 0. Every end of such a string re-establishes the next higher
+level of nesting (the one in effect prior to the string just
+ended). The direction is re-established to that in effect prior to the
+string just ended. The active data position is moved to the character
+position following the characters of the string just ended.
+
+The parameter values are:
+0 end of a directed string; re-establish the previous direction
+1 start of a directed string; establish the direction left-to-right
+2 start of a directed string; establish the direction right-to-left
+
+NOTE 1
+The effect of receiving a CVT, HT, SCP, SPD or VT control function
+within an SDS string is not defined by this Standard.
+
+NOTE 2
+The control functions for area definition (DAQ, EPA, ESA, SPA, SSA)
+should not be used within an SDS string.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.114
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps ; Pn ... ]
+Description: Linux private sequences
+
+ ESC [ 1 ; n ] Set color n as the underline color
+ ESC [ 2 ; n ] Set color n as the dim color
+ ESC [ 8 ] Make the current color pair the default attributes.
+ ESC [ 9 ; n ] Set screen blank timeout to n minutes.
+ ESC [ 10 ; n ] Set bell frequency in Hz.
+ ESC [ 11 ; n ] Set bell duration in msec.
+ ESC [ 12 ; n ] Bring specified console to the front.
+ ESC [ 13 ] Unblank the screen.
+ ESC [ 14 ; n ] Set the VESA powerdown interval in minutes.
+
+Source: Linux console_codes(4)
+Status: Linux private; clashes with ECMA-48 SDS
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps ^
+Mnemonic: SIMD
+Description: Select implicit movement direction
+
+Parameter default value: Ps = 0
+
+SIMD is used to select the direction of implicit movement of the data
+position relative to the character progression. The direction selected
+remains in effect until the next occurrence of SIMD.
+
+The parameter values are:
+
+0 the direction of implicit movement is the same as that of the
+ character progression
+
+1 the direction of implicit movement is opposite to that of the
+ character progression.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.120
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn `
+Mnemonic: HPA
+Description: Character position absolute
+
+Parameter default value: Pn = 1
+
+HPA causes the active data position to be moved to character position
+n in the active line (the line in the data component that contains the
+active data position), where n equals the value of Pn.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.57
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn a
+Mnemonic: HPR
+Description: Character position forward
+
+Parameter default value: Pn = 1
+
+HPR causes the active data position to be moved by n character
+positions in the data component in the direction of the character
+progression, where n equals the value of Pn.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.59
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn b
+Mnemonic: REP
+Description: Repeat
+
+Parameter default value: Pn = 1
+
+REP is used to indicate that the preceding character in the data
+stream, if it is a graphic character (represented by one or more bit
+combinations) including SPACE, is to be repeated n times, where n
+equals the value of Pn. If the character preceding REP is a control
+function or part of a control function, the effect of REP is not
+defined by this Standard.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.103
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps c
+Mnemonic: DA
+Description: Device attributes
+
+Parameter default value: Ps = 0
+
+With a parameter value not equal to 0, DA is used to identify the
+device which sends the DA. The parameter value is a device type
+identification code according to a register which is to be
+established. If the parameter value is 0, DA is used to request an
+identifying DA from a device.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.24
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI = Ps c
+Mnemonic: HSC
+Description: Hide or show cursor
+
+ Either hide or show the cursor. When you hide the cursor, scoansi
+ remembers its previous shape, so that if you restore it, it is
+ restored to its previous shape. Ps specifies how to handle the
+ cursor, and can be one of the following values:
+
+ ---------------------------------------------------------------
+ Value Meaning
+ ---------------------------------------------------------------
+ 0 Hide the cursor, saving its shape for a future restore
+ 1 Restore the cursor after hiding or making it very
+ visible
+ 2 Make the cursor very visible, saving its shape for a
+ future restore. If you move from a hidden to a very
+ visible shape, the cursor shape is not stored. This
+ ensures that when a restore command is given, the
+ original cursor shape is restored.
+
+Source: OpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW)
+Status: SCO private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI ? 10 c
+Description: Request DPS configuration
+
+Requests that the terminal sends current DPS (Dot Pattern Set)
+configuration.
+
+For the LA100, response is, for each installed DPS (in descending order):
+
+ESC [ Ps1 ; Ps2
+
+Ps1 Location
+010 DPS 1
+011 DPS 2
+012 DPS 3
+013 DPS 4
+014 DPS 5
+
+[ These are the same numbers as are used to select the DPSes in SGR --bjh ]
+
+Ps2 ROM ID
+001 US/UK Gothic 10 High Density Primary
+002 International Gothic 10 High Density Overlay
+003 US/UK Gothic 12 High Density Primary
+004 International Gothic 12 High Density Overlay
+005 US/UK Courier 10 High Density Primary
+006 International Courier 10 High Density Overlay
+007 US/UK Courier 12 High Density Primary
+008 International Courier 12 High Density Overlay
+009 US/UK Orator 10 High Density Primary
+
+For the LA210, the response is:
+
+ESC [ Ps1 ; Ps2 ; Ps3 ; Ps4 ; Ps5 SP D
+
+Ps1 is as for the LA100
+
+Ps2 Meaning
+1--64 Draft and letter standard DPS
+64--128 Draft and memo standard DPS
+129--192 Draft and letter custom DPS
+192--200 Draft and memo special DPS
+
+Odd-numbered standard DPSes contain US and UK character sets.
+Even-numbered ones also contain many others.
+
+Ps3 Type style
+0 none
+1 Gothic
+5 Courier
+9 Orator
+
+Ps4 Density
+0 12/6 cpi
+8 10/5 cpi
+
+Ps5 Matrix
+0 Letter (33x18)
+1 Memo (33x9)
+
+Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 ppE6,E48-E50
+Status: DEC private; LA100, LA210
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI ? Ps1 ; Ps2 ; ... ; Psn c
+Mnemonic: DS
+Description: Device attributes (DEC)
+
+This is a response from the terminal to DA.
+Ps1 specifies the operating level of the terminal. This determines
+the meaning of the other Pses (if any).
+
+Ps1 == 1 VT100; Ps2 is a bitmask:
+ 1 => STP (processor option)
+ 2 => AVO (advanced video option)
+ 4 => GPO (graphics processor option)
+ 8 => PP???
+
+Ps1 == 2 VT102
+
+Ps1 == 4 VT132; Ps2 same as VT100
+
+Ps1 == 5 VK100 (GIGI)
+
+Ps1 == 6 VT102 (again?)
+
+Ps1 == 7 VT131
+
+Ps1 == 10 Letterprinter
+ Ps2 absent => LA100 microcode version 1 (7-bit)
+ Ps2 == 2 => LA100 microcode version 2 (8-bit)
+ PS2 == 3 => LA210 microcode version 2 (8-bit)
+
+Ps1 == 12 VT125; Ps2 same as VT100; Graphics firmware version in Ps3
+
+Ps1 == 13 LQP02
+
+Ps1 == 15, Ps2 == 1
+ LA12 (DECwriter Correspondent)
+
+Ps1 == 17 LA50
+
+Ps1 == 19 DECtalk
+
+Ps1 == 61 Operating level 1 (emulated VT100)
+Ps1 == 62 Operating level 2 (VT200)
+Ps1 == 63 Operating level 3 (VT300)
+Ps1 == 64 Operating level 4 (VT400)
+Ps1 == 65 Operating level 5 (VT500)
+
+ for 61--62, the other Ps are a list of features:
+
+ Ps meaning
+ 1 132 columns
+ 2 Printer port
+ 3 ReGIS graphics
+ 4 Sixel graphics
+ 6 Selective erase
+ 7 Soft character set (DRCS)
+ 8 User-defined keys
+ 9 National replacement character sets
+ 10 Text ruling vector
+ 11 25th status line
+ 12 Serbo-croatian (SCS)
+ 13 Local editing mode
+ 14 8-bit architecture
+ 15 Technical character set
+ 16 Locator device port (ReGIS)
+ 17 Terminal state reports
+ 18 Windowing capability
+ 19 Dual sessions
+ 21 Horizontal scrolling
+ 22 Colour
+ 23 Greek
+ 24 Turkish
+ 29 ANSI text locator
+ 39 Page memory extension
+ 42 ISO Latin-2
+ 44 PC Term
+ 45 Soft key mapping
+ 46 ASCII terminal emulation (Wyse, TVI etc)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/msvibm_vt.txt>
+Source: vttest-990712 reports.c
+Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56
+ ppC31,E11,E19,E50,E84,E90,G6
+Status: DEC private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI > 0 c
+Mnemonic: DA
+Description: Device attributes (secondary request)
+
+Parameter default value: 0
+
+Requests secondary attributes from the terminal (model, firmware
+version, options).
+
+Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/docs/vt220-rm/chapter4.html>
+Status: DEC private; VT220
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI > 0 ; Pv ; Po c
+Mnemonic: DA
+Description: Device attributes (secondary response; xterm/VT100)
+
+xterm returns this to indicate that it's a VT100 even though a real
+VT100 wouldn't.
+
+Source: XFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05
+Status: xterm private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI > 1 ; Pv ; Po c
+Mnemonic: DA
+Description: Device attributes (secondary response, VT220)
+
+"I am a VT220 (identification code of 1), my firmware version is _____
+(Pv), and I have Po options installed."
+
+Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/docs/vt220-rm/chapter4.html>
+Status: DEC private; VT220
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn d
+Mnemonic: VPA
+Description: Line position absolute
+
+Parameter default value: Pn = 1
+
+VPA causes the active data position to be moved to line position n in
+the data component in a direction parallel to the line progression,
+where n equals the value of Pn.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.158
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn e
+Mnemonic: VPR
+Description: Line position forward
+
+Parameter default value: Pn = 1
+
+VPR causes the active data position to be moved by n line positions in
+the data component in a direction parallel to the line progression,
+where n equals the value of Pn.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.160
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn1 ; Pn2 f
+Mnemonic: HVP
+Description: Character and line position
+
+Parameter default values: Pn1 = 1; Pn2 = 1
+
+HVP causes the active data position to be moved in the data component
+to the n-th line position according to the line progression and to the
+m-th character position according to the character progression, where
+n equals the value of Pn1 and m equals the value of Pn2.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.63
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps g
+Mnemonic: TBC
+Description: Tabulation clear
+
+Parameter default value: Ps = 0
+
+TBC causes one or more tabulation stops in the presentation component
+to be cleared, depending on the parameter value:
+
+0 the character tabulation stop at the active presentation position is
+ cleared
+1 the line tabulation stop at the active line is cleared
+2 all character tabulation stops in the active line are cleared
+3 all character tabulation stops are cleared
+4 all line tabulation stops are cleared
+5 all tabulation stops are cleared
+
+In the case of parameter value 0 or 2 the number of lines affected
+depends on the setting of the TABULATION STOP MODE (TSM)
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.154
+Status: standard
+
+If the first parameter has a value of 100 then tab stops are reset to
+the default state (one every 8 columns).
+
+Source: IRIX 6.5.5 xwsh(1G)
+Status: SGI private; clashes with ECMA-48
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI = Pn1 g or CSI = Pn1 ; Pn2 ; Pn3 g
+Mnemonic: PRC
+Description: Print ROM character
+
+ If only one argument is passed to this function, display the glyph
+ for the PC ROM character specified by Pn1. If 3 parameters are
+ passed, then then Pn2 and Pn3 are used to set the graphic character
+ attribute foreground and background respectively, using the ISO color
+ numbering scheme described below.
+
+0 => black 8 => grey
+1 => blue 9 => light blue
+2 => green 10 => light green
+3 => cyan 11 => light cyan
+4 => red 12 => light red
+5 => magenta 13 => light magenta
+6 => brown 14 => yellow
+7 => white 15 => light white
+
+Source: OpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW)
+Status: SCO private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI > Pn g
+Description: Re-set tabs
+
+Clear all horizontal tab stops, then set tabs every Pn positions (i.e.
+Esc-[->-5-g sets tabs every five columns)
+
+Source: <URL:ftp://ftp.cs.cmu.edu/afs/cs/user/ralf/pub/rbcom346.zip>
+Status: RBComm? private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps ... h
+Mnemonic: SM
+Description: Set mode
+
+No parameter default value.
+
+SM causes the modes of the receiving device to be set as specified by
+the parameter values.
+
+NOTE
+Private modes may be implemented using private parameters, see 5.4.1
+and 7.4.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.2.125
+
+[ NB: See "Mode:" entries for individual modes ]
+
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps i
+Mnemonic: MC
+Description: Media copy
+
+Parameter default value: Ps = 0
+
+MC is used either to initiate a transfer of data from or to an
+auxiliary input/output device or to enable or disable the relay of the
+received data stream to an auxiliary input/output device, depending on
+the parameter value:
+
+0 initiate transfer to a primary auxiliary device
+1 initiate transfer from a primary auxiliary device
+2 initiate transfer to a secondary auxiliary device
+3 initiate transfer from a secondary auxiliary device
+4 stop relay to a primary auxiliary device
+5 start relay to a primary auxiliary device
+6 stop relay to a secondary auxiliary device
+7 start relay to a secondary auxiliary device
+
+This control function may not be used to switch on or off an auxiliary
+device.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.82
+
+Locator Controller Mode allows the host to communicate directly with
+the locator device without terminal intervention (similar to printer
+controller mode). When locator controller mode is set, all data
+received at the host port is transferred directly to the locator port
+without interpretation by the display terminal. The only exceptions
+are the communications control characters XON/XOFF (if enabled), and
+the control sequence to disabled locator controller mode. All
+characters received at locator port are transferred to the host port
+without interpretation. The host assumes full responsibility for the
+locator device.
+
+Locator controller mode is desirable for two reasons:
+
+1. It allows the host to explicitly initialize or configure locator
+ devices. A foriegn locator device might not wake up in DEC format
+ for example.
+
+2. It allows the locator port to be used for other auxilliary input
+ devices. A bar code reader could be interfaced to the locator port
+ for example, allowing the terminal to support a bar code reader
+ without pre-empting the printer port.
+
+Turn off locator controller mode (MC) CSI 6 i
+
+Turn on locator controller mode (MC) CSI 7 i
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt_mouse.html>
+Status: standard; DEC modifications
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI ? Ps i
+
+ ?0 Select auxiliary port for ReGIS hardcopy output.
+
+ ?1 copy the cursor line to
+ the auxilary(printer)Port
+
+ ?2 Select computer port for ReGIS hardcopy output.
+
+ ?3 copy the cursor line to
+ the modem(host) Port
+
+ ?4 diaable the copy passthru
+ print mode
+
+ ?5 enable the copy passthru
+ print mode
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.wyse.com/service/support/kbase/SEQwt.asp?Q=9>
+Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pC31
+Status: Wyse/DEC private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn j
+Mnemonic: HPB
+Description: Character position backward
+
+Parameter default value: Pn = 1
+
+HPB causes the active data position to be moved by n character
+positions in the data component in the direction opposite to that of
+the character progression, where n equals the value of Pn.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.58
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn k
+Mnemonic: VPB
+Description: Line position backward
+
+Parameter default value: Pn = 1
+
+VPB causes the active data position to be moved by n line positions in
+the data component in a direction opposite to that of the line
+progression, where n equals the value of Pn.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.159
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn k
+Description: disable (n=0) or enable (n=1) keyclick
+
+Source: termtypes.master 10.2.7
+Status: iBCS2 private; clashes with ECMA-48 HPB
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps ... l
+Mnemonic: RM
+Description: Reset mode
+
+No parameter default value.
+
+RM causes the modes of the receiving device to be reset as specified
+by the parameter values.
+
+NOTE
+Private modes may be implemented using private parameters, see 5.4.1
+and 7.4.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.106
+
+[ see "Mode:" entries for individual modes ]
+
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI = l
+Mnemonic: CHC
+Description: Clear and home cursor
+
+ Much like the Form Feed (FF) ASCII control character, this sequence
+ will erase the entire screen using the current fill attribute, but it
+ will ignore the current scrolling region if set (the entire screen is
+ always cleared, regardless of the scrolling region settings). The
+ cursor will be left at the top left of the scrolling region.
+
+Source: OpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW)
+Status: SCO private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI = ? l
+Description: Insert line up
+
+Source: jaltman@watsun.cc.columbia.edu (Jeffrey Altman) in comp.terminals
+ <7t2fe1$gj0$1@newsmaster.cc.columbia.edu>
+Status: ? private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps ... m
+Mnemonic: SGR
+Description: Select graphic rendition
+
+Parameter default value: Ps = 0
+
+SGR is used to establish one or more graphic rendition aspects for
+subsequent text. The established aspects remain in effect until the
+next occurrence of SGR in the data stream, depending on the setting of
+the GRAPHIC RENDITION COMBINATION MODE (GRCM). Each graphic rendition
+aspect is specified by a parameter value:
+
+[ In the following list, items are marked with their source on the right.
+ Items with no marking are ECMA-48 standard ones. ]
+
+0 default rendition (implementation-defined), cancels the effect of
+ any preceding occurrence of SGR in the data stream regardless of the
+ setting of the GRAPHIC RENDITION COMBINATION MODE (GRCM)
+1 bold or increased intensity
+2 faint, decreased intensity or second colour
+2 Sets the normal colors. This sequence takes the
+ next two arguments as the foreground and background
+ color to set, respectively Uses SCO colour numbers. [SCOANSI]
+3 italicized
+3 If backwards compatibility mode is enabled, then this sequence is
+ used to control the role of the blink bit in the M6845
+ video controller. The argument following the 3
+ indicated whether this bit should be interpreted as
+ blink, or as bold background. For example, the
+ sequence CSI 3;1 m will enable blinking text, whereas
+ the sequence CSI 3;0 m will enable bright background
+ colors. [SCOANSI]
+4 singly underlined
+5 slowly blinking (less then 150 per minute)
+6 rapidly blinking (150 per minute or more)
+6 VGA only: if blink (5) is on, turn blink off and background color to
+ its light equivalent (that is, brown to yellow) [iBCS2]
+6 steady (not blinking) [SCOANSI]
+7 negative image
+8 concealed characters
+9 crossed-out (characters still legible but marked as to be deleted)
+10 primary (default) font
+10 reset selected mapping, display control flag, and toggle meta flag. [iBCS2]
+11 first alternative font
+11 select null mapping, set display control flag, reset toggle meta
+ flag. [iBCS2]
+12 second alternative font
+12 select null mapping, set display control flag, set toggle meta
+ flag. (The toggle meta flag causes the high bit of a byte to be
+ toggled before the mapping table translation is done.) [Linux]
+13 third alternative font
+14 fourth alternative font
+15 fifth alternative font
+16 sixth alternative font
+17 seventh alternative font
+18 eighth alternative font
+19 ninth alternative font
+20 Fraktur (Gothic)
+21 doubly underlined
+21 set normal intensity [Linux]
+22 normal colour or normal intensity (neither bold nor faint)
+23 not italicized, not fraktur
+24 not underlined (neither singly nor doubly)
+25 steady (not blinking)
+26 (reserved for proportional spacing as specified in CCITT
+ Recommendation T.61)
+27 positive image
+28 revealed characters
+29 not crossed out
+30 black display
+31 red display
+32 green display
+33 yellow display
+34 blue display
+35 magenta display
+36 cyan display
+37 white display
+38 (reserved for future standardization; intended for setting
+ character foreground colour as specified in ISO 8613-6 [CCITT
+ Recommendation T.416])
+38 set underscore on, set default foreground color [Linux]
+38 If next two parameters are 5 and Ps, set foreground color to Ps [xterm]
+38 enables underline option; white foreground with white underscore [iBCS2]
+39 default display colour (implementation-defined)
+39 disables underline option [iBCS2]
+40 black background
+41 red background
+42 green background
+43 yellow background
+44 blue background
+45 magenta background
+46 cyan background
+47 white background
+48 (reserved for future standardization; intended for setting
+ character background colour as specified in ISO 8613-6 [CCITT
+ Recommendation T.416])
+48 If next two parameters are 5 and Ps, set background color to Ps [xterm]
+49 default background colour (implementation-defined)
+50 (reserved for cancelling the effect of the rendering aspect
+ established by parameter value 26)
+50 Reset to the original color pair [SCOANSI]
+51 framed
+51 Reset all colors to the system default [SCOANSI]
+52 encircled
+53 overlined
+54 not framed, not encircled
+55 not overlined
+56 (reserved for future standardization)
+57 (reserved for future standardization)
+58 (reserved for future standardization)
+59 (reserved for future standardization)
+60 ideogram underline or right side line
+61 ideogram double underline or double line on the right side
+62 ideogram overline or left side line
+63 ideogram double overline or double line on the left side
+64 ideogram stress marking
+65 cancels the effect of the rendition aspects established by
+ parameter values 60 to 64
+90 Set foreground color to (bright) Black [aixterm]
+91 Set foreground color to (bright) Red [aixterm]
+92 Set foreground color to (bright) Green [aixterm]
+93 Set foreground color to (bright) Yellow [aixterm]
+94 Set foreground color to (bright) Blue [aixterm]
+95 Set foreground color to (bright) Magenta [aixterm]
+96 Set foreground color to (bright) Cyan [aixterm]
+97 Set foreground color to (bright) White [aixterm]
+
+90 Set foreground color to (bright) Black [SCOANSI]
+91 Set foreground color to (bright) Blue [SCOANSI]
+92 Set foreground color to (bright) Green [SCOANSI]
+93 Set foreground color to (bright) Cyan [SCOANSI]
+94 Set foreground color to (bright) Red [SCOANSI]
+95 Set foreground color to (bright) Magenta [SCOANSI]
+96 Set foreground color to (bright) Yellow [SCOANSI]
+97 Set foreground color to (bright) White [SCOANSI]
+
+100 Set foreground and background color to default [rxvt]
+100 Set background color to (bright) Black [aixterm]
+101 Set background color to (bright) Red [aixterm]
+102 Set background color to (bright) Green [aixterm]
+103 Set background color to (bright) Yellow [aixterm]
+104 Set background color to (bright) Blue [aixterm]
+105 Set background color to (bright) Magenta [aixterm]
+106 Set background color to (bright) Cyan [aixterm]
+107 Set background color to (bright) White [aixterm]
+
+100 Set background color to (bright) Black [SCOANSI]
+101 Set background color to (bright) Blue [SCOANSI]
+102 Set background color to (bright) Green [SCOANSI]
+103 Set background color to (bright) Cyan [SCOANSI]
+104 Set background color to (bright) Red [SCOANSI]
+105 Set background color to (bright) Magenta [SCOANSI]
+106 Set background color to (bright) Yellow [SCOANSI]
+107 Set background color to (bright) White [SCOANSI]
+
+DEC private SGRs:
+?1 Set secondary overprint mode [LQP02]
+?2 Enable shadow print [LQP02]
+
+NOTE
+The usable combinations of parameter values are determined by the
+implementation.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.118
+Source: Linux console_codes(4)
+Source: termtypes.master 10.2.7
+Source: XFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05
+Source: XFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.52 2004/04/18 15:18:48
+Source: UnixWare 7 display(7)
+Source: OpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW)
+Status: standard; Linux, iBCS2, aixterm extensions
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI = Ps ; Pn m
+Mnemonic: SSM
+Description: Set specific margin
+
+ This sequence can be used to set any one of the 4 margins. Parameter
+ Ps indicates which margin to set (Ps=0 for the top margin, Ps=1 for
+ the bottom, Ps=2 for the left and Ps=3 for the right). Pn is the row
+ or column to set the margin to. If after this control sequence has
+ been processed, the top or bottom margins are not at the top of the
+ screen, and the left and right margins are at the screen boundary,
+ then the scrolling region is set to the size specified. If either of
+ the left or right margins are not at the screen boundary then the
+ scrolling region is bound by the current margins.
+
+Source: OpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW)
+Status: SCO private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI ? = m
+Description: Delete line down
+
+Source: jaltman@watsun.cc.columbia.edu (Jeffrey Altman) in comp.terminals
+ <7t2fe1$gj0$1@newsmaster.cc.columbia.edu>
+Status: ? private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps n
+Mnemonic: DSR
+Description: Device status report
+
+Parameter default value: Ps = 0
+
+DSR is used either to report the status of the sending device or to
+request a status report from the receiving device, depending on the
+parameter values:
+
+0 ready, no malfunction detected
+1 busy, another DSR must be requested later
+2 busy, another DSR will be sent later
+3 some malfunction detected, another DSR must be requested later
+4 some malfunction detected, another DSR will be sent later
+5 a DSR is requested
+6 a report of the active presentation position or of the active data
+ position in the form of ACTIVE POSITION REPORT (CPR) is requested
+
+DSR with parameter value 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 may be sent either
+unsolicited or as a response to a request such as a DSR with a
+parameter value 5 or MESSAGE WAITING (MW).
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.35
+Status: standard
+
+100-107
+
+Report the rgb value (#rrggbb) for a given color using a DCS Pn .y Ps
+ST escape sequence (see DCS below for the values that xwsh will use
+for Pn). DSR parameter 100 maps to the text color, 101 to the page
+color, 102 the selection text color, 103 to the selection page color,
+104 to the cursor text color, 105 to the cursor page color, 106 to the
+half intensity color and 107 to the bold color.
+
+Source: IRIX 6.5.5 xwsh(1G)
+Status: SGI private; clashes with ECMA-48
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI ? Pn n
+Mnemonic: DSR
+Description: Device status report
+
+ Request CSI ? 1 n [LA50] disable all unsolicited status reports.
+ Request CSI ? 2 n [LA50] enable unsolicited brief reports and
+ send an extended one.
+ Request CSI ? 3 n [LA50] enable unsolicited extended reports and
+ send one.
+ Response CSI ? 20 n malfunction detected [also LCP01]
+ then CSI ? Ps ... n
+
+ Ps Fault
+ 21 Hardware failure
+ 22 Communication failure (event)
+ 23 Input buffer overflow (event)
+ 24 Printer deselected
+ 26 Cover open
+ 27 Out of consumables (ink/paper)
+ 28 Program load failure
+ 42 Font load failure
+ 44 Font memory exceeded
+ 104 Too many fonts
+
+ Request CSI ? 6 n same as CSI 6 n but for VT340s
+
+ Request CSI ? 15 n printer status
+ Response CSI ? 10 n printer ready
+ or CSI ? 11 n printer is not ready
+ or CSI ? 13 n no printer
+ or CSI ? 19 n printer assigned to other session
+
+ Request CSI ? 25 n User Definable Key status
+ Response CSI ? 20 n UDKs are unlocked
+ or CSI ? 21 n UDKs are locked
+
+ Request CSI ? 26 n keyboard dialect
+ Response CSI ? 27; Ps n in MS Kermit this is controlled by
+ command SET TERMINAL CHARACTER-SET <country>
+ Ps Country Ps Country
+ 1 North American/ASCII
+ 2 British
+ 3 Flemish
+ 4 French Canadian
+ 5 Danish
+ 6 Finnish
+ 7 German
+ 8 Dutch
+ 9 Italian
+ 10 Swiss (French)
+ 11 Swiss (German)
+ 12 Swedish
+ 13 Norwegian/Danish
+ 14 Hebrew
+ 14 French
+ 15 Spanish
+ 16 Portugese
+
+ Request CSI ? 55 n locator status
+ Response CSI ? 53 n no locator
+ or CSI ? 50 n locator ready
+ or CSI ? 58 n locator busy
+
+ Request CSI ? 56 n locator type
+ Response CSI ? 57 Ps n Ps = 0 => No locator
+ Ps = 1 => Locator is a mouse
+
+ Request CSI ? 63 ; Pn n Request checksum of macro definitions
+ Pn is returned with DECCKSR
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/msvibm_vt.txt>
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt_mouse.html>
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/swedish_vt102_codes.txt>
+Source: vttest-990712 vt220.c
+Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
+Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 ppE84,E124
+Status: DEC private; VT200
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps ... o
+Mnemonic: DAQ
+Description: Define area qualification
+
+Parameter default value: Ps = 0
+
+DAQ is used to indicate that the active presentation position in the
+presentation component is the first character position of a qualified
+area. The last character position of the qualified area is the
+character position in the presentation component immediately preceding
+the first character position of the following qualified area.
+
+The parameter value designates the type of qualified area:
+0 unprotected and unguarded
+1 protected and guarded
+2 graphic character input
+3 numeric input
+4 alphabetic input
+5 input aligned on the last character position of the qualified area
+6 fill with ZEROs
+7 set a character tabulation stop at the active presentation position
+ (the first character position of the qualified area) to indicate the
+ beginning of a field
+8 protected and unguarded
+9 fill with SPACEs
+10 input aligned on the first character position of the qualified area
+11 the order of the character positions in the input field is
+ reversed, i.e. the last position in each line becomes the first and
+ vice versa; input begins at the new first position.
+
+This control function operates independently of the setting of the
+TABULATION STOP MODE (TSM). The character tabulation stop set by
+parameter value 7 applies to the active line only.
+
+NOTE
+The control functions for area definition (DAQ, EPA, ESA, SPA, SSA)
+should not be used within an SRS string or an SDS string.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.25
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI p
+Mnemonic: SUNBOW
+Description: Black on white
+
+Sets the display into black-on-white mode (the default).
+
+Source: SunOS 5.7 wscons(7D) [paraphrased]
+Status: Sun private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps p
+Description: Begin field attribute
+
+Ps is a variable representing
+
+Ps =0 normal
+ 1 dim
+ 2 blink
+ 3 blink dim
+ 4 blank
+ 5 blank dim
+ 6 blank
+ 7 blank dim
+ 8 underline
+ 9 underline dim
+ 10 underline blink
+ 11 underline blink dim
+ 12 underline blank
+ 13 underline blank dim
+ 14 Underline blank blink
+ 15 underline blank blink dim
+ 16 Inverse
+ 17 inverse dim
+ 18 inverse blink
+ 19 Inverse blink dim
+ 20 inverse blank
+ 21 inverse blank dim
+ 22 inverse blank
+ 23 inverse blank dim
+ 24 inverse underline
+ 25 inverse underline dim
+ 26 inverse underline blink
+ 27 inverse underline blink
+ dim
+ 28 inverse underline blank
+ 29 inverse underline blank
+ dim
+ 30 inverse underline blank
+ blink
+ 31 inverse underline blank
+ blink di
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.wyse.com/service/support/kbase/SEQwt.asp?Q=9>
+Status: DEC private?
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps q
+Mnemonic: DECLL
+Description: Load LEDs
+
+ Load the four programmable LEDs on the keyboard according to the
+ parameter(s).
+
+ Parameter Meaning
+ -----------------------
+ 0 Clear All LEDs (default)
+ 1 Light L1
+ 2 Light L2
+ 3 Light L3
+ 4 Light L4
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>
+
+ ESC [ 0 q: clear all LEDs
+ ESC [ 1 q: set Scroll Lock LED
+ ESC [ 2 q: set Num Lock LED
+ ESC [ 3 q: set Caps Lock LED
+
+Source: Linux console_codes(4)
+Status: DEC private; VT100
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI q
+Mnemonic: SUNWOB
+Description: White on black
+
+Sets the display to white-on-black mode.
+
+Source: SunOS 5.7 wscons(7D) [paraphrased]
+Status: Sun private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pt ; Pb r
+Mnemonic: DECSTBM
+Description: Set top and bottom margins
+
+ Pt is the number of the top line of the scrolling region;
+ Pb is the number of the bottom line of the scrolling region
+ and must be greater than Pt.
+ (The default for Pt is line 1, the default for Pb is the end
+ of the screen)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_reference_card.txt>
+Status: DEC private; VT100
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn1 ; Pn2 ; Pn3 ; Pn4 r
+Mnemonic: CSR
+Description: Change Scrolling Region
+
+Where 3 or more parameters are specified, the parameters are the top,
+bottom, left and right margins respectively. If you omit the last
+parameter, the extreme edge of the screen is assumed to be the right
+margin.
+
+If any of the parameters are out of bounds, they are clipped. If any
+of the parameters would cause an overlap (i.e. the bottom margin is
+higher than the top margin, or the right margin is less that the left
+margin), then this command is ignored and no scrolling region or
+window will be active. If all of the parameters are correct, then the
+cursor is moved to the top left hand corner of the newly-created
+region. The new region will now define the bounds of all scroll and
+cursor motion operations.
+
+[ If only two parameters are specified, this behaves as DECSTBM ]
+
+Source: OpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW)
+Status: SCO private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn r
+Mnemonic: SUNSCRL
+Description: Set scrolling
+
+Default parameter: Pn = 0
+
+If Pn > 0, sets the screen to scroll Pn lines whenever a LF would push
+the cursor off the bottom. Setting it to the number of lines on the
+screen causes the screen to clear when it fills.
+
+If Pn == 0, sets "wrap mode", where the cursor moves back to the top
+line of the screen when LFed off the bottom, and where lines are
+cleared when the cursor LFs into them.
+
+Source: SunOS 5.7 wscons(7D) [paraphrased]
+Status: Sun private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI = r
+Mnemonic: RSM
+Description: Reset margins
+
+ This sequence can be used to reset all of the margins to cover the
+ entire screen. This will deactivate the scrolling region (if
+ defined). If not, this sequence has no effect. The cursor is not
+ moved.
+
+Source: OpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW)
+Status: SCO private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI ? Ps r
+Description: Restore DEC Private Mode
+
+ Ps = 1 -> Normal/Application Cursor Keys (DECCKM)
+ Ps = 3 -> 80/132 Column Mode (DECCOLM)
+ Ps = 4 -> Jump (Fast)/Smooth (Slow) Scroll (DECSCLM)
+ Ps = 5 -> Normal/Reverse Video (DECSCNM)
+ Ps = 6 -> Normal/Origin Cursor Mode (DECOM)
+ Ps = 7 -> No Wraparound/Wraparound Mode (DECAWM)
+ Ps = 8 -> Auto-repeat/No Auto-repeat Keys (DECARM)
+ Ps = 9 -> Don't Send/Send MIT Mouse Row & Column on
+ Button Press
+ Ps = 40 -> Disallow/Allow 80 <-> 132 Mode
+ Ps = 41 -> Off/On curses(5) fix
+ Ps = 44 -> Turn Off/On Margin Bell
+ Ps = 45 -> No Reverse-wraparound/Reverse-wraparound
+ Mode
+ Ps = 46 -> Stop/Start Logging
+ Ps = 47 -> Use Normal/Alternate Screen Buffer
+ Ps = 1000 -> mouse bogus sequence (???)
+ Ps = 1001 -> mouse bogus sequence (???)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/xterm_controls.txt>
+Status: xterm? private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn1 ; Pn2 s
+Mnemonic: DECSLRM
+Description: Set left and right margins
+
+Sets left margin to Pn1, right margin to Pn2
+
+Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE10
+Status: DEC private; VT400, printers
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI s
+Mnemonic: SCP
+Description: Save cursor position
+
+Save the current cursor position. The cursor position can be restored
+later using the RCP sequence.
+
+Source: OpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW)
+Status: SCO private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI s
+Mnemonic: SUNRESET
+Description: Reset terminal emulator
+
+Resets modes and font. Doesn't move cursor or change screen.
+
+Source: SunOS 5.7 wscons(7D) [paraphrased]
+Status: Sun private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI ? Ps s
+Description: Save DEC Private Mode
+
+
+ Ps = 1 -> Normal/Application Cursor Keys (DECCKM)
+ Ps = 3 -> 80/132 Column Mode (DECCOLM)
+ Ps = 4 -> Jump (Fast)/Smooth (Slow) Scroll (DECSCLM)
+ Ps = 5 -> Normal/Reverse Video (DECSCNM)
+ Ps = 6 -> Normal/Origin Cursor Mode (DECOM)
+ Ps = 7 -> No Wraparound/Wraparound Mode (DECAWM)
+ Ps = 8 -> Auto-repeat/No Auto-repeat Keys (DECARM)
+ Ps = 9 -> Don't Send/Send MIT Mouse Row & Column on
+ Button Press
+ Ps = 40 -> Disallow/Allow 80 <-> 132 Mode
+ Ps = 41 -> Off/On curses(5) fix
+ Ps = 44 -> Turn Off/On Margin Bell
+ Ps = 45 -> No Reverse-wraparound/Reverse-wraparound
+ Mode
+ Ps = 46 -> Stop/Start Logging
+ Ps = 47 -> Use Normal/Alternate Screen Buffer
+ Ps = 1000 -> mouse bogus sequence (???)
+ Ps = 1001 -> mouse bogus sequence (???)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/xterm_controls.txt>
+Status: xterm? private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn t
+Mnemonic: DECSLPP
+Description: Set lines per physical page
+
+On the multipage VT330, you can issue a DECSLPP (set lines per page) command:
+
+ Esc [ 2 4 t 6 pages of 24 lines each, single session
+ Esc [ 3 6 t 4 pages of 36 lines each, single session
+ Esc [ 7 2 t 2 pages of 72 lines each, single session
+ Esc [ 1 4 4 t 1 page of 144 lines each, single session
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt220_codes.txt>
+
+On LA100:
+Sets form length to Pn lines. Sets top margin and active line to line
+one. Sets bottom margin to line Pn. Default is 1
+
+Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE10
+Status: DEC private; VT330, printers
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps t
+Description: Define non-normal (enhance) attribute
+
+[setup level 1]
+
+Defines the enhance attribute
+(see SGR,Non-0)
+
+ Ps = 0 dim
+ 1 inverse
+ 2 underline
+
+[ On a Wyse-75, this chooses which attribute SGR with a non-zero argument
+ produces. ]
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.wyse.com/service/support/kbase/SEQwt.asp?Q=9>
+Status: Wyse private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn ... u
+Mnemonic: DECSHTS
+Description: Set horizontal tab stops
+
+Sets horizontal tab stops at the given values for Pn (up to 16 for the
+LA100).
+
+Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE10
+Status: DEC private; printers
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI u
+Mnemonic: RCP
+Description: Restore cursor position
+
+Restore the cursor to the position it occupied at the last time an SCP
+sequence was received.
+
+Source: OpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW)
+Status: SCO private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn ... v
+Mnemonic: DECSVTS
+Description: Set vertical tab stops
+
+Set vertical tab stops at lines Pn ... (up to 16 on LA100)
+
+Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE11
+Status: DEC private; printers
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps w
+Mnemonic: DECSHORP
+Description: Set horizontal pitch
+
+Ps =
+0 10.0 cpi, 80 cpl
+1 10.0 cpi, 80 cpl
+2 12.0 cpi, 96 cpl
+3 13.2 cpi
+4 16.5 cpi, 132 cpl
+5 5.0 cpi
+6 6.0 cpi
+7 6.6 cpi
+8 8.25 cpi
+9 15.0 cpi
+
+Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
+Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE108
+Status: DEC private; printers
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps x
+Mnemonic: DECREQTPARM
+Description: Request terminal parameters
+
+ The host sends this sequence to request the VT100 to send a DECREPTPARM
+ sequence back. {Ps} can be either 0 or 1. If 0, the terminal will be
+ allowed to send unsolicited DECREPTPARMs. These reports will be
+ generated each time the terminal exits the SET-UP mode. If {Ps} is 1,
+ then the terminal will only generate DECREPTPARMs in response to a
+ request.
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>
+Status: DEC private; VT100
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Psol ; Ppar ; Pnbits ; Pxspd ; Prspd ; Pcmul ; Pflags x
+Mnemonic: DECREPTPARM
+Description: Report terminal parameters
+
+ This sequence is generated by the VT100 to notify the host of the
+ status of selected terminal parameters. The status sequence may be
+ sent when requested by the host (via DECREQTPARM) or at the terminal's
+ discretion. On power up or reset, the VT100 is inhibited from sending
+ unsolicited reports.
+
+ The meanings of the sequence paramters are:
+
+ Parameter Value Meaning
+ ------------------------------------------------------------------
+ {sol} 1 This message is a report.
+ 2 This message is a report, and the terminal is
+ only reporting on request.
+
+ {par} 1 No parity set
+ 4 Parity set and odd
+ 5 Parity set and even
+
+ {nbits} 1 8 bits per character
+ 2 7 bits per character
+
+ {xspd} 0 Speed set to 50 bps
+ -and- 8 Speed set to 75 bps
+ {rspd} 16 Speed set to 110 bps
+ 24 Speed set to 134.5 bps
+ {xspd}= 32 Speed set to 150 bps
+ Transmit 40 Speed set to 200 bps
+ Speed 48 Speed set to 300 bps
+ 56 Speed set to 600 bps
+ {rspd}= 64 Speed set to 1200 bps
+ Recieve 72 Speed set to 1800 bps
+ Speed 80 Speed set to 2000 bps
+ 88 Speed set to 2400 bps
+ 96 Speed set to 3600 bps
+ 104 Speed set to 4800 bps
+ 112 Speed set to 9600 bps
+ 120 Speed set to 19200 bps
+ 128 Speed set to 38400 bps [VT220?]
+ 136 Speed set to 57600 bps [RBComm]
+ 144 Speed set to 115200 bps [RBComm]
+
+ {cmul} 1 The bit rate multiplier is 16
+
+ {flags} 0-15 This value communicates the four switch values
+ in block 5 of SET-UP B, which are only visible
+ to the user when an STP option is installed.
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>
+Source: vttest-990712 reports.c
+Source: <URL:ftp://ftp.cs.cmu.edu/afs/cs/user/ralf/pub/rbcom346.zip>
+Status: DEC private; VT100
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI x
+Mnemonic: DGRTC
+Description: Read terminal configuration
+
+This command queries for terminal configuration information, such as
+model ID, keyboard type, etc.
+
+Terminal configuration is sent back in the following form:
+
+ CSI <model ID> ; <status> ; <firmware rev> <keyboard> x
+
+where:
+
+ <model ID> = 52
+
+ <status> = 00--15
+
+ <firmware rev> = 0--7
+
+ <keyboard> is one of:
+ 00: No keyboard
+ 19: Swiss/French
+ 20: Swiss/German
+ 21: Canadian/English
+ 22: Kata Kana
+ 24: Canadian/French
+ 25: United States
+ 26: United Kingdom
+ 27: French
+ 28: German
+ 29: Swedish/Finnish
+ 30: Spanish
+ 31: Danish/Norwegian
+
+Source: Dasher D410 and D460 Display Terminals User's Manual
+ <URL:http://vt100.net/dg/dasher_d410_d460_users_manual.pdf>
+Status: Data General private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps1 ; Ps2 y
+Mnemonic: DECTST
+Description: Invoke confidence test
+
+If Ps1 == 2 [VT100]
+ Ps2 is the parameter indicating the test to be done. It is computed by
+ taking the weight indicated for each desired test and adding them
+ together. If Ps2 is 0, no test is performed but the VT100 is reset.
+
+ Test Weight
+ --------------------------------------------------------------
+ POST (ROM checksum, RAM NVR, keyboardm and AVO) 1
+ Data Loop Back (Loopback connector required) 2
+ EIA Modem Control Test (Loopback connector req.) 4
+ Repeat Testing until failure 8
+ Printer loopback test 16
+
+If Ps1 == 6 [LCP01]
+ Ps2 = 1 Powerup self-tests
+ Ps2 = 2 Print a test pattern
+
+If Ps1 == 4, Ps2 == 1 [VT125]
+ Further Ps parameters are tests to carry out:
+ 1 VT125 power-up test
+ 2 VT125 computer port data loopback test
+ 3 VT125 auxiliary port data loopback test
+ 4 VT125 display test
+ 5 VT125 video bitmap memory test
+ 9 Repeat selected tests continuously until power-off or failure
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/swedish_vt102_codes.txt>
+Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 ppC32,E124
+Status: DEC private; VT100
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps z
+Mnemonic: DECVERP
+Description: Set vertical pitch
+
+Ps =
+0 6 lpi, 63 lpp
+1 6 lpi, 63 lpp
+2 8 lpi, 84 lpp
+3 12 lpi, 125 lpp
+4 2 lpi, 21 lpp
+5 3 lpi, 32 lpp
+6 4 lpi, 42 lpp
+
+Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
+Status: DEC private; printers
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn z
+Mnemonic: SSW
+Description: Screen switch
+
+Make the multiscreen number specified by parameter Pn the current one.
+If Pn refers to an invalid multiscreen number, no action is taken.
+
+[ "Multiscreen" seems to be SCOish for "virtual console" ]
+
+Source: OpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW)
+Status: SCO private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI = z
+Mnemonic: CAT
+Description: Clear all tabs
+
+ Clear all tab stops.
+
+Source: OpenServer 5.0.6 screen(HW)
+Status: SCO private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps |
+Mnemonic: DECTTC
+Description: Select transmit termination character
+
+Ps Meaning
+0 function disabled
+1 Form Feed, FF
+2 End of Text, ETX
+3 End of Transmission, EOT
+4 Carriage Return, CR
+5 Device Control 3, DC3
+
+Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pC27
+Status: DEC private; VT131 only
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps }
+Mnemonic: DECPRO
+Description: Set protected field attributes
+
+Ps Meaning
+0 no protection
+1 bold protection
+4 underline protection
+5 blink protection
+7 reverse video protection
+254 all attributes off protection
+
+Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pC27
+Status: DEC private; VT131 only
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn SP @
+Mnemonic: SL
+Description: Scroll left
+
+Parameter default value: Pn = 1
+
+SL causes the data in the presentation component to be moved by n
+character positions if the line orientation is horizontal, or by n
+line positions if the line orientation is vertical, such that the data
+appear to move to the left; where n equals the value of Pn.
+
+The active presentation position is not affected by this control function.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.121
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn SP A
+Mnemonic: SR
+Description: Scroll right
+
+Parameter default value: Pn = 1
+
+SR causes the data in the presentation component to be moved by n
+character positions if the line orientation is horizontal, or by n
+line positions if the line orientation is vertical, such that the data
+appear to move to the right; where n equals the value of Pn.
+
+The active presentation position is not affected by this control
+function.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.135
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn1 ; Pn2 SP B
+Mnemonic: GSM
+Description: Graphic size modification
+
+Parameter default values: Pn1 = 100; Pn2 = 100
+
+GSM is used to modify for subsequent text the height and/or the width
+of all primary and alternative fonts identified by FONT SELECTION
+(FNT) and established by GRAPHIC SIZE SELECTION (GSS). The
+established values remain in effect until the next occurrence of GSM
+or GSS in the data steam.
+
+Pn1 specifies the height as a percentage of the height established by GSS
+
+Pn2 specifies the width as a percentage of the width established by GSS
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.55
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn SP C
+Mnemonic: GSS
+Description: Graphic size selection
+
+No parameter default value.
+
+GSS is used to establish for subsequent text the height and the width
+of all primary and alternative fonts identified by FONT SELECTION
+(FNT). The established values remain in effect until the next
+occurrence of GSS in the data stream.
+
+Pn specifies the height, the width is implicitly defined by the
+height.
+
+The unit in which the parameter value is expressed is that established
+by the parameter value of SELECT SIZE UNIT (SSU).
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.56
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps1 ; Ps2 SP D
+Mnemonic: FNT
+Description: Font selection
+
+Parameter default values: Ps1 = 0; Ps2 =0
+
+FNT is used to identify the character font to be selected as primary
+or alternative font by subsequent occurrences of SELECT GRAPHIC
+RENDITION (SGR) in the data stream. Ps1 specifies the primary or
+alternative font concerned:
+
+0 primary font
+1 first alternative font
+2 second alternative font
+3 third alternative font
+4 fourth alternative font
+5 fifth alternative font
+6 sixth alternative font
+7 seventh alternative font
+8 eighth alternative font
+9 ninth alternative font
+
+Ps2 identifies the character font according to a register which is to
+be established.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.53
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn SP E
+Mnemonic: TSS
+Description: Thin space specification
+
+No parameter default value.
+
+TSS is used to establish the width of a thin space for subsequent
+text. The established width remains in effect until the next
+occurrence of TSS in the data stream, see annex C.
+
+Pn specifies the width of the thin space.
+
+The unit in which the parameter value is expressed is that established
+by the parameter value of SELECT SIZE UNIT (SSU).
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.157
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps ... SP F
+Mnemonic: JFY
+Description: Justify
+
+Parameter default value: Ps = 0
+
+JFY is used to indicate the beginning of a string of graphic
+characters in the presentation component that are to be justified
+according to the layout specified by the parameter values, see
+annex C:
+
+0 no justification, end of justification of preceding text
+1 word fill
+2 word space
+3 letter space
+4 hyphenation
+5 flush to line home position margin
+6 centre between line home position and line limit position margins
+7 flush to line limit position margin
+8 Italian hyphenation
+
+The end of the string to be justified is indicated by the next
+occurrence of JFY in the data stream.
+
+The line home position is established by the parameter value of SET
+LINE HOME (SLH). The line limit position is established by the
+parameter value of SET LINE LIMIT (SLL).
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.73
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn1 ; Pn2 SP G
+Mnemonic: SPI
+Description: Spacing increment
+
+No parameter default values.
+
+SPI is used to establish the line spacing and the character spacing
+for subsequent text. The established line spacing remains in effect
+until the next occurrence of SPI or of SET LINE SPACING (SLS) or of
+SELECT LINE SPACING (SVS) in the data stream. The established
+character spacing remains in effect until the next occurrence of SET
+CHARACTER SPACING (SCS) or of SELECT CHARACTER SPACING (SHS) in the
+data stream, see annex C.
+
+Pn1 specifies the line spacing
+
+Pn2 specifies the character spacing
+
+The unit in which the parameter values are expressed is that
+established by the parameter value of SELECT SIZE UNIT (SSU).
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.132
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn ... SP H
+Mnemonic: QUAD
+Description: Quad
+
+Parameter default value: Ps = 0
+
+QUAD is used to indicate the end of a string of graphic characters
+that are to be positioned on a single line according to the layout
+specified by the parameter values, see annex C:
+
+0 flush to line home position margin
+
+1 flush to line home position margin and fill with leader
+
+2 centre between line home position and line limit position margins
+
+3 centre between line home position and line limit position margins
+ and fill with leader
+
+4 flush to line limit position margin
+
+5 flush to line limit position margin and fill with leader
+
+6 flush to both margins
+
+The beginning of the string to be positioned is indicated by the
+preceding occurrence in the data stream of either QUAD or one of the
+following formator functions: FORM FEED (FF), CHARACTER AND LINE
+POSITION (HVP), LINE FEED (LF), NEXT LINE (NEL), PAGE POSITION
+ABSOLUTE (PPA), PAGE POSITION BACKWARD (PPB), PAGE POSITION FORWARD
+(PPR), REVERSE LINE FEED (RI), LINE POSITION ABSOLUTE (VPA), LINE
+POSITION BACKWARD (VPB), LINE POSITION FORWARD (VPR), or LINE
+TABULATION (VT).
+
+The line home position is established by the parameter value of SET
+LINE HOME (SLH). The line limit position is established by the
+parameter value of SET LINE LIMIT (SLL).
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.102
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps SP I
+Mnemonic: SSU
+Description: Select size unit
+
+Parameter default value: Ps = 0
+
+SSU is used to establish the unit in which the numeric parameters of
+certain control functions are expressed. The established unit remains
+in effect until the next occurrence of SSU in the data stream.
+
+The parameter values are
+0 CHARACTER - The dimensions of this unit are device-dependent
+1 MILLIMETRE
+2 COMPUTER DECIPOINT - 0,035 28 mm (1/720 of 25,4 mm)
+3 DECIDIDOT - 0,037 59 mm (10/266 mm)
+4 MIL - 0,025 4 mm (1/1 000 of 25,4 mm)
+5 BASIC MEASURING UNIT (BMU) - 0,021 17 mm (1/1 200 of 25,4 mm)
+6 MICROMETRE - 0,001 mm
+7 PIXEL - The smallest increment that can be specified in a device
+8 DECIPOINT - 0,035 14 mm (35/996 mm)
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.139
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps SP J
+Mnemonic: PFS
+Description: Page format selection
+
+Parameter default value: Ps = 0
+
+PFS is used to establish the available area for the imaging of pages
+of text based on paper size. The pages are introduced by the
+subsequent occurrence of FORM FEED (FF) in the data stream.
+
+The established image area remains in effect until the next occurrence
+of PFS in the data stream. The parameter values are (see also
+annex E):
+
+0 tall basic text communication format
+1 wide basic text communication format
+2 tall basic A4 format
+3 wide basic A4 format
+4 tall North American letter format
+5 wide North American letter format
+6 tall extended A4 format
+7 wide extended A4 format
+8 tall North American legal format
+9 wide North American legal format
+10 A4 short lines format
+11 A4 long lines format
+12 B5 short lines format
+13 B5 long lines format
+14 B4 short lines format
+15 B4 long lines format
+
+The page home position is established by the parameter value of SET
+PAGE HOME (SPH), the page limit position is established by the
+parameter value of SET PAGE LIMIT (SPL).
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.91
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI ? Ps SP J
+Mnemonic: PFS
+Description: Page format selection (DEC extensions)
+
+Ps Paper size
+20 Tall extended North American letter format
+21 Wide extended North Americal letter format
+22 Tall extended A4 format
+23 Wide extended A4 format
+
+Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE110
+Status: DEC private; LN03
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps SP K
+Mnemonic: SHS
+Description: Select character spacing
+
+Parameter default value: Ps = 0
+
+SHS is used to establish the character spacing for subsequent
+text. The established spacing remains in effect until the next
+occurrence of SHS or of SET CHARACTER SPACING (SCS) or of SPACING
+INCREMENT (SPI) in the data stream. The parameter values are
+
+0 10 characters per 25,4 mm
+1 12 characters per 25,4 mm
+2 15 characters per 25,4 mm
+3 6 characters per 25,4 mm
+4 3 characters per 25,4 mm
+5 9 characters per 50,8 mm
+6 4 characters per 25,4 mm
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.118
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps SP L
+Mnemonic: SVS
+Description: Select line spacing
+
+Parameter default value: Ps = 0
+
+SVS is used to establish the line spacing for subsequent text. The
+established spacing remains in effect until the next occurrence of SVS
+or of SET LINE SPACING (SLS) or of SPACING INCREMENT (SPI) in the data
+stream. The parameter values are:
+
+0 6 lines per 25,4 mm
+1 4 lines per 25,4 mm
+2 3 lines per 25,4 mm
+3 12 lines per 25,4 mm
+4 8 lines per 25,4 mm
+5 6 lines per 30,0 mm
+6 4 lines per 30,0 mm
+7 3 lines per 30,0 mm
+8 12 lines per 30,0 mm
+9 2 lines per 25,4 mm
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.149
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps SP M
+Mnemonic: IGS
+Description: Identify graphic subrepertoire
+
+No parameter default value.
+
+IGS is used to indicate that a repertoire of the graphic characters of
+ISO/IEC 10367 is used in the subsequent text.
+
+The parameter value of IGS identifies a graphic character repertoire
+registered in accordance with ISO/IEC 7350.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.66
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn ... SP N
+Mnemonic: HTSA
+Description: Character tabulation set absolute
+
+The control function CHARACTER TABULATION SET ABSOLUTE (HTSA) which
+was coded as a control sequence with any number of numeric parameters
+(CSI Pn ... 02/00 04/14) and the use of which was already declared
+deprecated in the fourth Edition of this Standard has now been
+removed.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. F.8.3
+Status: standard; obsolete
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps SP O
+Mnemonic: IDCS
+Description: Identify device control string
+
+No parameter default value.
+
+IDCS is used to specify the purpose and format of the command string
+of subsequent DEVICE CONTROL STRINGs (DCS). The specified purpose and
+format remain in effect until the next occurrence of IDCS in the data
+stream.
+
+The parameter values are
+
+1 reserved for use with the DIAGNOSTIC state of the STATUS REPORT
+ TRANSFER MODE (SRTM)
+
+2 reserved for Dynamically Redefinable Character Sets (DRCS) according
+ to Standard ECMA-35.
+
+The format and interpretation of the command string corresponding to
+these parameter values are to be defined in appropriate standards. If
+this control function is used to identify a private command string, a
+private parameter value shall be used.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.65
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn SP P
+Mnemonic: PPA
+Description: Page position absolute
+
+Parameter default value: Pn = 1
+
+PPA causes the active data position to be moved in the data component
+to the corresponding character position on the n-th page, where n
+equals the value of Pn.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.96
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn SP Q
+Mnemonic: PPR
+Description: Page position forward
+
+Parameter default value: Pn = 1
+
+PPR causes the active data position to be moved in the data component
+to the corresponding character position on the n-th following page,
+where n equals the value of Pn.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.98
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn SP R
+Mnemonic: PPB
+Description: Page position backward
+
+Parameter default value: Pn = 1
+
+PPB causes the active data position to be moved in the data component
+to the corresponding character position on the n-th preceding page,
+where n equals the value of Pn.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.97
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps1 ; Ps2 SP S
+Mnemonic: SPD
+Description: Select presentation directions
+
+Parameter default value: Ps1 = 0; Ps2 = 0
+
+SPD is used to select the line orientation, the line progression, and
+the character path in the presentation component. It is also used to
+update the content of the presentation component and the content of
+the data component. This takes effect immediately.
+
+Ps1 specifies the line orientation, the line progression and the
+character path:
+
+0 line orientation: horizontal
+ line progression: top-to-bottom
+ character path: left-to-right
+
+1 line orientation: vertical
+ line progression: right-to-left
+ character path: top-to-bottom
+
+2 line orientation: vertical
+ line progression: left-to-right
+ character path: top-to-bottom
+
+3 line orientation: horizontal
+ line progression: top-to-bottom
+ character path: right-to-left
+
+4 line orientation: vertical
+ line progression: left-to-right
+ character path: bottom-to-top
+
+5 line orientation: horizontal
+ line progression: bottom-to-top
+ character path: right-to-left
+
+6 line orientation: horizontal
+ line progression: bottom-to-top
+ character path: left-to-right
+
+7 line orientation: vertical
+ line progression: right-to-left
+ character path: bottom-to-top
+
+Ps2 specifies the effect on the content of the presentation component
+and the content of the data component:
+
+0 undefined (implementation-dependent)
+
+NOTE
+This may also permit the effect to take place after the next
+occurrence of CR, FF or any control function which initiates an
+absolute movement of the active presentation position or the active
+data position.
+
+1 the content of the presentation component is updated to correspond
+ to the content of the data component according to the newly
+ established characteristics of the presentation component; the
+ active data position is moved to the first character position in the
+ first line in the data component, the active presentation position
+ in the presentation component is updated accordingly
+
+2 the content of the data component is updated to correspond to the
+ content of the presentation component according to the newly
+ established characteristics of the presentation component; the active
+ presentation position is moved to the first character position in the
+ first line in the presentation component, the active data position in
+ the data component is updated accordingly.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.130
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn1 ; Pn2 SP T
+Mnemonic: DTA
+Description: Dimension text area
+
+No parameter default value.
+
+DTA is used to establish the dimensions of the text area for subsequent pages.
+
+The established dimensions remain in effect until the next occurrence
+of DTA in the data stream.
+
+Pn1 specifies the dimension in the direction perpendicular to the line
+orientation
+
+Pn2 specifies the dimension in the direction parallel to the line orientation
+
+The unit in which the parameter value is expressed is that established
+by the parameter value of SELECT SIZE UNIT (SSU).
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed 8.3.36
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn SP U
+Mnemonic: SLH
+Description: Set line home
+
+No parameter default value.
+
+If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE is set to PRESENTATION, SLH is
+used to establish at character position n in the active line (the line
+that contains the active presentation position) and lines of
+subsequent text in the presentation component the position to which
+the active presentation position will be moved by subsequent
+occurrences of CARRIAGE RETURN (CR), DELETE LINE (DL), INSERT LINE
+(IL) or NEXT LINE (NEL) in the data stream; where n equals the value
+of Pn. In the case of a device without data component, it is also the
+position ahead of which no implicit movement of the active
+presentation position shall occur.
+
+If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE is set to DATA, SLH is used to
+establish at character position n in the active line (the line that
+contains the active data position) and lines of subsequent text in the
+data component the position to which the active data position will be
+moved by subsequent occurrences of CARRIAGE RETURN (CR), DELETE LINE
+(DL), INSERT LINE (IL) or NEXT LINE (NEL) in the data stream; where n
+equals the value of Pn. It is also the position ahead of which no
+implicit movement of the active data position shall occur.
+
+The established position is called the line home position and remains
+in effect until the next occurrence of SLH in the data stream.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.122
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn SP V
+Mnemonic: SLL
+Description: Set line limit
+
+No parameter default value.
+
+If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE is set to PRESENTATION, SLL is
+used to establish at character position n in the active line (the line
+that contains the active presentation position) and lines of
+subsequent text in the presentation component the position to which
+the active presentation position will be moved by subsequent
+occurrences of CARRIAGE RETURN (CR), or NEXT LINE (NEL) in the data
+stream if the parameter value of SELECT IMPLICIT MOVEMENT DIRECTION
+(SIMD) is equal to 1; where n equals the value of Pn. In the case of a
+device without data component, it is also the position beyond which no
+implicit movement of the active presentation position shall occur.
+
+If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE is set to DATA, SLL is used to
+establish at character position n in the active line (the line that
+contains the active data position) and lines of subsequent text in the
+data component the position beyond which no implicit movement of the
+active data position shall occur. It is also the position in the data
+component to which the active data position will be moved by
+subsequent occurrences of CR or NEL in the data stream, if the
+parameter value of SELECT IMPLICIT MOVEMENT DIRECTION (SIMD) is equal
+to 1.
+
+The established position is called the line limit position and remains
+in effect until the next occurrence of SLL in the data stream.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.123
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn SP W
+Mnemonic: FNK
+Description: Function key
+
+No parameter default value.
+
+FNK is a control function in which the parameter value identifies the
+function key which has been operated.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.52
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps SP X
+Mnemonic: SPQR
+Description: Select print quality and rapidity
+
+Parameter default value: Ps = 0
+
+SPQR is used to select the relative print quality and the print speed
+for devices the output quality and speed of which are inversely
+related. The selected values remain in effect until the next
+occurrence of SPQR in the data stream. The parameter values are
+
+0 highest available print quality, low print speed
+1 medium print quality, medium print speed
+2 draft print quality, highest available print speed
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.134
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps1 ; Ps2 SP Y
+Mnemonic: SEF
+Description: Sheet eject and feed
+
+Parameter default values: Ps1 = 0; Ps2 = 0
+
+SEF causes a sheet of paper to be ejected from a printing device into
+a specified output stacker and another sheet to be loaded into the
+printing device from a specified paper bin.
+
+Parameter values of Ps1 are:
+0 eject sheet, no new sheet loaded
+1 eject sheet and load another from bin 1
+2 eject sheet and load another from bin 2
+...
+n eject sheet and load another from bin n
+
+Parameter values of Ps2 are:
+0 eject sheet, no stacker specified
+1 eject sheet into stacker 1
+2 eject sheet into stacker 2
+...
+n eject sheet into stacker n
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.116
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps SP Z
+Mnemonic: PEC
+Description: Presentation expand or contract
+
+Parameter default value: Ps = 0
+
+PEC is used to establish the spacing and the extent of the graphic
+characters for subsequent text. The spacing is specified in the line
+as multiples of the spacing established by the most recent occurrence
+of SET CHARACTER SPACING (SCS) or of SELECT CHARACTER SPACING (SHS) or
+of SPACING INCREMENT (SPI) in the data stream. The extent of the
+characters is implicitly established by these control functions. The
+established spacing and the extent remain in effect until the next
+occurrence of PEC, of SCS, of SHS or of SPI in the data stream. The
+parameter values are
+
+0 normal (as specified by SCS, SHS or SPI)
+1 expanded (multiplied by a factor not greater than 2)
+2 condensed (multiplied by a factor not less than 0,5)
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.90
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn SP [
+Mnemonic: SSW
+Description: Set space width
+
+No parameter default value.
+
+SSW is used to establish for subsequent text the character escapement
+associated with the character SPACE. The established escapement
+remains in effect until the next occurrence of SSW in the data stream
+or until it is reset to the default value by a subsequent occurrence
+of CARRIAGE RETURN/LINE FEED (CR/LF), CARRIAGE RETURN/FORM FEED
+(CR/FF), or of NEXT LINE (NEL) in the data stream, see annex C.
+
+
+Pn specifies the escapement. The unit in which the parameter value is
+expressed is that established by the parameter value of SELECT SIZE
+UNIT (SSU).
+
+The default character escapement of SPACE is specified by the most
+recent occurrence of SET CHARACTER SPACING (SCS) or of SELECT
+CHARACTER SPACING (SHS) or of SELECT SPACING INCREMENT (SPI) in the
+data stream if the current font has constant spacing, or is specified
+by the nominal width of the character SPACE in the current font if
+that font has proportional spacing.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.140
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn SP \
+Mnemonic: SACS
+Description: Set additional character separation
+
+Parameter default value: Pn = 0
+
+SACS is used to establish extra inter-character escapement for
+subsequent text. The established extra escapement remains in effect
+until the next occurrence of SACS or of SET REDUCED CHARACTER
+SEPARATION (SRCS) in the data stream or until it is reset to the
+default value by a subsequent occurrence of CARRIAGE RETURN/LINE FEED
+(CR LF) or of NEXT LINE (NEL) in the data stream, see annex C.
+
+Pn specifies the number of units by which the inter-character
+escapement is enlarged.
+
+The unit in which the parameter value is expressed is that established
+by the parameter value of SELECT SIZE UNIT (SSU).
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.107
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps ... SP ]
+Mnemonic: SAPV
+Description: Select alternative presentation variants
+
+Parameter default value: Ps = 0
+
+SAPV is used to specify one or more variants for the presentation of
+subsequent text. The parameter values are
+
+0 default presentation (implementation-defined); cancels the effect of
+ any preceding occurrence of SAPV in the data stream
+
+1 the decimal digits are presented by means of the graphic symbols
+ used in the Latin script
+
+2 the decimal digits are presented by means of the graphic symbols
+ used in the Arabic script, i.e. the Hindi symbols
+
+3 when the direction of the character path is right-to-left, each of
+ the graphic characters in the graphic character set(s) in use which
+ is one of a left/right-handed pair (parentheses, square brackets,
+ curly brackets, greater-than/less-than signs, etc.) is presented as
+ "mirrored", i.e. as the other member of the pair. For example, the
+ coded graphic character given the name LEFT PARENTHESIS is presented
+ as RIGHT PARENTHESIS, and vice versa
+
+4 when the direction of the character path is right-to-left, all
+ graphic characters which represent operators and delimiters in
+ mathematical formulae and which are not symmetrical about a vertical
+ axis are presented as mirrored about that vertical axis
+
+5 the following graphic character is presented in its isolated form
+
+6 the following graphic character is presented in its initial form
+
+7 the following graphic character is presented in its medial form
+
+8 the following graphic character is presented in its final form
+
+9 where the bit combination 02/14 is intended to represent a decimal
+ mark in a decimal number it shall be presented by means of the
+ graphic symbol FULL STOP
+
+10 where the bit combination 02/14 is intended to represent a decimal
+ mark in a decimal number it shall be presented by means of the
+ graphic symbol COMMA
+
+11 vowels are presented above or below the preceding character
+
+12 vowels are presented after the preceding character
+
+13 contextual shape determination of Arabic scripts, including the
+ LAM-ALEPH ligature but excluding all other Arabic ligatures
+
+14 contextual shape determination of Arabic scripts, excluding all
+ Arabic ligatures
+
+15 cancels the effect of parameter values 3 and 4
+
+16 vowels are not presented
+
+17 when the string direction is right-to-left, the italicized
+ characters are slanted to the left; when the string direction is
+ left-to-right, the italicized characters are slanted to the right
+
+18 contextual shape determination of Arabic scripts is not used, the
+ graphic characters - including the digits - are presented in the
+ form they are stored (Pass-through)
+
+19 contextual shape determination of Arabic scripts is not used, the
+ graphic characters- excluding the digits - are presented in the
+ form they are stored (Pass-through)
+
+20 the graphic symbols used to present the decimal digits are device
+ dependent
+
+21 establishes the effect of parameter values 5, 6, 7, and 8 for the
+ following graphic characters until cancelled
+
+22 cancels the effect of parameter value 21, i.e. re-establishes the
+ effect of parameter values 5, 6, 7, and 8 for the next single
+ graphic character only.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.108
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps SP ^
+Mnemonic: STAB
+Description: Selective tabulation
+
+No parameter default value.
+
+STAB causes subsequent text in the presentation component to be
+aligned according to the position and the properties of a tabulation
+stop which is selected from a list according to the value of the
+parameter Ps.
+
+The use of this control function and means of specifying a list of
+tabulation stops to be referenced by the control function are
+specified in other standards, for example ISO 8613-6.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.144
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps SP _
+Mnemonic: GCC
+Description: Graphic character combination
+
+Parameter default value: Ps = 0
+
+GCC is used to indicate that two or more graphic characters are to be
+imaged as one single graphic symbol. GCC with a parameter value of 0
+indicates that the following two graphic characters are to be imaged
+as one single graphic symbol; GCC with a parameter value of 1 and GCC
+with a parameter value of 2 indicate respectively the beginning and
+the end of a string of graphic characters which are to be imaged as
+one single graphic symbol.
+
+NOTE
+GCC does not explicitly specify the relative sizes or placements of
+the component parts of a composite graphic symbol. In the simplest
+case, two components may be "half-width" and side-by-side. For
+example, in Japanese text a pair of characters may be presented
+side-by-side, and occupy the space of a normal-size Kanji character.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.54
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn SP `
+Mnemonic: TATE
+Description: Tabulation aligned trailing edge
+
+No parameter default value.
+
+TATE causes a character tabulation stop calling for trailing edge
+alignment to be set at character position n in the active line (the
+line that contains the active presentation position) and lines of
+subsequent text in the presentation component, where n equals the
+value of Pn. TATE causes the replacement of any tabulation stop
+previously set at that character position, but does not affect other
+tabulation stops.
+
+A text string aligned with a tabulation stop set by TATE will be
+positioned so that the (trailing edge of the) first graphic character
+of the string is placed at the tabulation stop.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.153
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn SP a
+Mnemonic: TALE
+Description: Tabulation aligned leading edge
+
+No parameter default value.
+
+TALE causes a character tabulation stop calling for leading edge
+alignment to be set at character position n in the active line (the
+line that contains the active presentation position) and lines of
+subsequent text in the presentation component, where n equals the
+value of Pn. TALE causes the replacement of any tabulation stop
+previously set at that character position, but does not affect other
+tabulation stops.
+
+A text string aligned with a tabulation stop set by TALE will be
+positioned so that the (leading edge of the) last graphic character of
+the string is placed at the tabulation stop.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.152
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn SP b
+Mnemonic: TAC
+Description: Tabulation aligned centred
+
+No parameter default value.
+
+TAC causes a character tabulation stop calling for centring to be set
+at character position n in the active line (the line that contains the
+active presentation position) and lines of subsequent text in the
+presentation component, where n equals the value of Pn. TAC causes the
+replacement of any tabulation stop previously set at that character
+position, but does not affect other tabulation stops.
+
+A text string centred upon a tabulation stop set by TAC will be
+positioned so that the (trailing edge of the) first graphic character
+and the (leading edge of the) last graphic character are at
+approximately equal distances from the tabulation stop.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.151
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn1 ; Pn2 SP c
+Mnemonic: TCC
+Description: Tabulation centred on character
+
+No parameter default value for Pn1
+
+Parameter default value: Pn2 = 32
+
+TCC causes a character tabulation stop calling for alignment of a
+target graphic character to be set at character position n in the
+active line (the line that contains the active presentation position)
+and lines of subsequent text in the presentation component, where n
+equals the value of Pn1, and the target character about which centring
+is to be performed is specified by Pn2. TCC causes the replacement of
+any tabulation stop previously set at that character position, but
+does not affect other tabulation stops.
+
+The positioning of a text string aligned with a tabulation stop set by
+TCC will be determined by the first occurrence in the string of the
+target graphic character; that character will be centred upon the
+tabulation stop. If the target character does not occur within the
+string, then the trailing edge of the first character of the string
+will be positioned at the tabulation stop.
+
+The value of Pn2 indicates the code table position (binary value) of
+the target character in the currently invoked code. For a 7-bit code,
+the permissible range of values is 32 to 127; for an 8-bit code, the
+permissible range of values is 32 to 127 and 160 to 255.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.155
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn SP d
+Mnemonic: TSR
+Description: Tabulation stop remove
+
+No parameter default value.
+
+TSR causes any character tabulation stop at character position n in
+the active line (the line that contains the active presentation
+position) and lines of subsequent text in the presentation component
+to be cleared, but does not affect other tabulation stops. n equals
+the value of Pn.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.156
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps SP e
+Mnemonic: SCO
+Description: Select character orientation
+
+Parameter default value: Ps = 0
+
+SCO is used to establish the amount of rotation of the graphic
+characters following in the data stream. The established value
+remains in effect until the next occurrence of SCO in the data stream.
+
+The parameter values are
+0 0 deg
+1 45 deg
+2 90 deg
+3 135 deg
+4 180 deg
+5 225 deg
+6 270 deg
+7 315 deg
+
+Rotation is positive, i.e. counter-clockwise and applies to the normal
+presentation of the graphic characters along the character path. The
+centre of rotation of the affected graphic characters is not defined
+by this Standard.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.110
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn SP f
+Mnemonic: SRCS
+Description: Set reduced character separation
+
+Parameter default value: Pn = 0
+
+SRCS is used to establish reduced inter-character escapement for
+subsequent text. The established reduced escapement remains in effect
+until the next occurrence of SRCS or of SET ADDITIONAL CHARACTER
+SEPARATION (SACS) in the data stream or until it is reset to the
+default value by a subsequent occurrence of CARRIAGE RETURN/LINE FEED
+(CR/LF) or of NEXT LINE (NEL) in the data stream, see annex C.
+
+Pn specifies the number of units by which the inter-character
+escapement is reduced.
+
+The unit in which the parameter values are expressed is that
+established by the parameter value of SELECT SIZE UNIT (SSU).
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.136
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn SP g
+Mnemonic: SCS
+Description: Set character spacing
+
+No parameter default value.
+
+SCS is used to establish the character spacing for subsequent
+text. The established spacing remains in effect until the next
+occurrence of SCS, or of SELECT CHARACTER SPACING (SHS) or of SPACING
+INCREMENT (SPI) in the data stream, see annex C.
+
+Pn specifies the character spacing.
+
+The unit in which the parameter value is expressed is that established
+by the parameter value of SELECT SIZE UNIT (SSU).
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.112
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn SP h
+Mnemonic: SLS
+Description: Set line spacing
+
+No parameter default value.
+
+SLS is used to establish the line spacing for subsequent text. The
+established spacing remains in effect until the next occurrence of SLS
+or of SELECT LINE SPACING (SVS) or of SPACING INCREMENT (SPI) in the
+data stream.
+
+Pn specifies the line spacing.
+
+The unit in which the parameter value is expressed is that established
+by the parameter value of SELECT SIZE UNIT (SSU).
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.124
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn SP i
+Mnemonic: SPH
+Description: Set page home
+
+No parameter default value.
+
+If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE is set to PRESENTATION, SPH is
+used to establish at line position n in the active page (the page that
+contains the active presentation position) and subsequent pages in the
+presentation component the position to which the active presentation
+position will be moved by subsequent occurrences of FORM FEED (FF) in
+the data stream; where n equals the value of Pn. In the case of a
+device without data component, it is also the position ahead of which
+no implicit movement of the active presentation position shall occur.
+
+If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE is set to DATA, SPH is used to
+establish at line position n in the active page (the page that
+contains the active data position) and subsequent pages in the data
+component the position to which the active data position will be moved
+by subsequent occurrences of FORM FEED (FF) in the data stream; where
+n equals the value of Pn. It is also the position ahead of which no
+implicit movement of the active presentation position shall occur.
+
+The established position is called the page home position and remains
+in effect until the next occurrence of SPH in the data stream.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.131
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn SP j
+Mnemonic: SPL
+Description: Set page limit
+
+No parameter default value.
+
+If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE is set to PRESENTATION, SPL is
+used to establish at line position n in the active page (the page that
+contains the active presentation position) and pages of subsequent
+text in the presentation component the position beyond which the
+active presentation position can normally not be moved; where n equals
+the value of Pn. In the case of a device without data component, it is
+also the position beyond which no implicit movement of the active
+presentation position shall occur.
+
+If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE is set to DATA, SPL is used to
+establish at line position n in the active page (the page that
+contains the active data position) and pages of subsequent text in the
+data component the position beyond which no implicit movement of the
+active data position shall occur.
+
+The established position is called the page limit position and remains
+in effect until the next occurrence of SPL in the data stream.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.133
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps1 ; Ps2 SP k
+Mnemonic: SCP
+Description: Select character path
+
+No parameter default values.
+
+SCP is used to select the character path, relative to the line
+orientation, for the active line (the line that contains the active
+presentation position) and subsequent lines in the presentation
+component. It is also used to update the content of the active line in
+the presentation component and the content of the active line (the
+line that contains the active data position) in the data
+component. This takes effect immediately.
+
+Ps1 specifies the character path:
+
+1 left-to-right (in the case of horizontal line orientation), or
+ top-to-bottom (in the case of vertical line orientation)
+
+2 right-to-left (in the case of horizontal line orientation), or
+ bottom-to-top (in the case of vertical line orientation)
+
+Ps2 specifies the effect on the content of the presentation component
+and the content of the data component:
+
+0 undefined (implementation-dependent)
+
+NOTE
+This may also permit the effect to take place after the next
+occurrence of CR, NEL or any control function which initiates an
+absolute movement of the active presentation position or the active
+data position.
+
+1 the content of the active line in the presentation component (the
+ line that contains the active presentation position) is updated to
+ correspond to the content of the active line in the data component
+ (the line that contains the active data position) according to the
+ newly established character path characteristics in the presentation
+ component; the active data position is moved to the first character
+ position in the active line in the data component, the active
+ presentation position in the presentation component is updated
+ accordingly
+
+2 the content of the active line in the data component (the line that
+ contains the active data position) is updated to correspond to the
+ content of the active line in the presentation component (the line
+ that contains the active presentation position) according to the newly
+ established character path characteristics of the presentation
+ component; the active presentation position is moved to the first
+ character position in the active line in the presentation component,
+ the active data position in the data component is updated
+ accordingly.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.111
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps SP q
+Mnemonic: DECSCUSR
+Description: Set cursor style
+
+ Where ps can be 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 meaning Blinking Block, Blinking Block,
+ Steady Block, Blink Underline, Steady Underline, respectively.
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/ansi_dec_controls_news.txt>
+Status: DEC private; VT520
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI ... SP s
+Mnemonic: DECNS
+Description: New sheet
+
+Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
+Status: DEC private; PPL3
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI ... SP w
+Mnemonic: DECSITF
+Description: Select input tray failover
+
+Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
+Status: DEC private; PPL3
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI ... SP x
+Mnemonic: DECSDPM
+Description: Set Duplex Print Mode
+
+Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
+Status: DEC private; PPL3
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI ... SP z
+Mnemonic: DECVPFS
+Description: Variable page format select
+
+Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
+Status: DEC private; PPL3
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI ... SP {
+Mnemonic: DECSSS
+Description: Set sheet size
+
+Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
+Status: DEC private; PPL3
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI ... SP |
+Mnemonic: DECRVEC
+Description: Draw relative vector
+
+Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
+Status: DEC private; PPL3
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI !
+Description: Determining RIP support
+
+The ESC[! is the code that RIP supporting BBS's use to determine
+whether your terminal has RIP (Remote Imaging Protocol) support. If so,
+then your terminal returns a string to the remote side in the form
+"RIPScript version x.xx" or some such thing. This is probably why you have
+been receiving that code.
+
+I found the RIPscript 1.54 spec at ftp.telegrafix.com.
+
+Source:
+ <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/ansi_dec_controls_news.txt>
+Status: TeleGrafix private; clashes with ECMA-48
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI ! p
+Mnemonic: DECSTR
+Description: Soft terminal reset
+
+sets terminal to power-up default states
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt220_codes.txt>
+ "VT220 Programmer Pocket Guide" EK-VT220-HR-001, page 33
+
+(keeps screen)
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/msvibm_vt.txt>
+Status: DEC private; VT220
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn1 ; Pn2 ; Pn3 ; Pn4 ! s
+Mnemonic: DECFIL
+Description: Right justification
+
+0 <= Pn1 <= 1535 (1/720-inch units, 1/120-inch increments)
+0 <= Pn2 <= 255 (number of printing characters)
+0 <= Pn3 <= 1535 (1/720-inch units, 1/120-inch increments)
+0 <= Pn4 <= 255 (number of spaces)
+
+Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE102
+Status: DEC private; LQP02
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps ! v
+Mnemonic: DECASFC
+Description: Automatic sheet feeder control
+
+Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
+Status: DEC private; PPL2
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn ! w
+Mnemonic: DECUND
+Description: Select undeline character
+
+Select underline character Pn other than default character.
+
+Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE90
+Status: DEC private; LQP02
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps ! x
+Mnemonic: DECPTS
+Description: Printwheel table select
+
+Ps == 0,1 Select printwheel table 1
+Ps == 2 Select printwheel table 2
+
+Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE90
+Status: DEC private; LQP02
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn ! y
+Mnemonic: DECSS
+Descripton: Select spacing
+
+Set horizontal spacing increment (proportional spacing mode).
+
+6 <= Pn <= 768 (decipoint units, 1/720 inch)
+
+Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 ppE91,E99
+Status: DEC private; LQP02
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps1 ; Pn2 ; Pn3 ; Pn4 ; Pn5 ! |
+Mnemonic: DECVEC
+Description: Draw vector
+
+Ps1 Meaning
+0 Draw X line
+1 Draw Y line
+
+Pn1 = X start value
+Pn2 = Y start value
+Pn4 = line length
+Pn5 = line width
+
+Units are decipoints or pixels according to SSU.
+
+Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE107
+Status: DEC private; LN03
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI ... ! }
+Mnemonic: DECFIN
+Description: Document finishing
+
+Instructs the device whether to change the offset at which paper is
+delivered to the output tray.
+
+Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
+Status: DEC private; LQP03
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps1 ; Ps2 " p
+Mnemonic: DECSCL
+Description: Set compatibility level
+
+CSI 6 1 " p -> Level 1 (VT100) compatibility
+CSI 6 2 " p -> Level 2 (VT200) compatibility, 8-bit controls
+CSI 6 2 ; 0 " p -> ditto
+CSI 6 2 ; 1 " p -> ditto, 7-bit controls
+CSI 6 2 ; 2 " p -> ditto, 8-bit controls
+
+Ps1 = 63 selects Level 3 (VT300)
+Ps1 = 64 selects Level 4 (VT400)
+
+Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/docs/vt220-rm/chapter4.html> VT220 Ref Manual
+Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
+Status: DEC private; VT200
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps " q
+Mnemonic: DECSCA
+Description: Select character attributes
+
+Ps Action
+ 0 All attributes off (does not apply to SGR)
+ 1 Designate character as "non-erasable" by DECSEL/DECSED. (Attribute on)
+ 2 Designate character "erasable" by DECSEL/DECSED. (Attribute off)
+
+
+NOTE: A parameter value of 0 implies the default which is attributes
+off (erasable by DECSEL/DECSED). A parameter value of 2 is an explicit
+request for this attribute to be off (erasable by DECSEL/DECSED).
+
+Souce: <URL:http://vt100.net/docs/vt220-rm/chapter4.html>
+Status: DEC private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn1 ; Pn2 " s
+Mnemonic: DECPWA
+Description: Page width alignment
+
+Pn1 specifies the left edge of the print arera relatiove to the left
+edge of platen. Pn2 specifies width of print area. Pn1 and Pn2 are
+measured in units of 1/12 inch.
+
+Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE42
+Status: DEC private; printers
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI ... " v
+Mnemonic: DECRQDE
+Description: Request device extent
+
+Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
+Status: DEC private; VT400
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI ... " w
+Mnemonic: DECRPDE
+Description: Report device extent
+
+Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
+Status: DEC private; VT400
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI ... " z
+Mnemonic: DECDEN
+Description: Select density
+
+ESC [ 0 " z selects default (draft) density
+ESC [ 1 " z selects draft density
+ESC [ 2 " z selects letter density (medium or high density depending on
+ DPS).
+
+Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
+Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE46
+Status: DEC private; printers
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps ; " { String ST
+Mnemonic: DECRFS
+Description: Request font status
+
+Ps Meaning
+0 Send status of all fonts
+1 Send status of ROM resident, down line loaded, and cartridge
+2 Send status of memory bytes remaining for host loaded fonts
+
+String = type family and font
+
+Response (DECFSR) is:
+
+CSI 2 " nnn ST
+
+Where nnn = number of bytes remaining in memory
+
+Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE107
+Status: DEC private; LN03
+
+Response is:
+
+ESC [ ? Pn ; Pm SP D
+
+Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE124
+Status: DEC private; LCP01
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn $ p
+Mnemonic: DECRQM
+Description: Request mode settings
+
+Pn is a mode number, as passed to SM or RM. It can include a leading
+? to specify a DEC private mode. The terminal returns CSI Pn ; Pn2 $
+y, where Pn2 is 1 if the mode is in the set state.
+
+Source: Paul Williams <paul@celigne.co.uk> in comp.terminals
+ <7t76qq$23q$1@nnrp1.deja.com>
+Status: DEC private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn1 ; Pn2 ; Pn3 ; Pn4 ; Ps1 ... Psn $ r
+Mnemonic: DECCARA
+Description: Change attributes in rectangular area
+
+Change the visual attributes for characters in a specified area of
+display memorythe characters themselves remain unchanged. The DECSACE
+control function is used to determine whether all or just some of the
+character positions are affected. The parameters are:
+
+Pn1 Top line
+Pn2 Left column
+Pn3 Bottom line
+Pn4 Right column
+
+Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
+
+Ps1 ... Psn are standard SGR character attributes.
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt220_codes.txt>
+Status: DEC private; VT420
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn1 ; Pn2 ; Pn3 ; Pn4 ; Ps1 ; ... ; Psn $ t
+Mnemonic: DECRARA
+Description: Reverse attributes in rectangular area
+
+Reverse the visual attributes for characters in a specified area of
+display memorythe characters themselves remain unchanged. The DECSACE
+control function is used to determine whether all or just some of the
+character positions are affected. The parameters are:
+
+Pn1 Top line
+Pn2 Left column
+Pn3 Bottom line
+Pn4 Right column
+Ps1...Psn Normal SGR character attributes
+
+Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
+Status: DEC private; VT420
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps ; ... $ u
+Mnemonic: DECRQTSR
+Description: Request terminal state report
+
+Ps = 1 => Host request for a terminal state report (returns DECTSR)
+
+Ps = 2 => Host request for color table report. In this case the
+ second parameter signifies the colour space; 0 or 1
+ indicates HLS (the default) and 2 indicates RGB. The reply
+ is DECCTR. If the terminal doesn't understand, it responds
+ with DCS 0 $ s ST.
+
+RBComm always returns DCS 1 $ ST (no state information returned)
+
+Source: <URL:ftp://ftp.cs.cmu.edu/afs/cs/user/ralf/pub/rbcom346.zip>
+Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
+Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
+Status: DEC private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn1 ; Pn2 ; Pn3 ; Pn4 ; Pn5 ; Pn6 ; Pn7 ; Pn8 $ v
+Mnemonic: DECCRA
+Description: Copy rectangular area
+
+Copy a rectangular area of display memory from one part of page memory
+to another. Characters and their attributes remain unchanged. The
+parameters Pn1 through Pn5 describe the area to be copied:
+
+Pn1 Top line
+Pn2 Left column
+Pn3 Bottom line
+Pn4 Right column
+Pn5 Page number
+
+The parameters <n6> through <n8> describe where the area should be copied:
+
+Pn6 Top line
+Pn7 Left column
+Pn8 Page number
+
+Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
+Status: DEC private; VT400
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps $ w
+Mnemonic: DECRQPSR
+Description: Request presentation state report
+
+/*
+ * From Kermit 3.13 & VT220 pocket guide
+ *
+ * Request CSI 1 $ w cursor information report
+
+See DECCIR for response
+
+CSI 2 $ w tab stop report
+
+See DECTABSR for response
+
+Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
+Source: vttest-990712 vt420.c
+Status: DEC private; VT300
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn1 ; Pn2 ; Pn3 ; Pn4 ; Pn5 $ x
+Mnemonic: DECFRA
+Description: Fill rectangular area
+
+Fill an area in display memory with a specified character. The fill
+character takes on the visual attributes set by the last SGR control
+function, not the attributes of the characters that it replaces.
+Current line attributes (for example, the attributes that specify
+double-wide, double-high characters) remain unchanged. The parameters
+are:
+
+Pn1 Decimal code of fill character
+Pn2 Top line
+Pn3 Left column
+Pn4 Bottom line
+Pn5 Right column
+
+Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
+Status: DEC private; VT400
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn ; Ps $ y
+Mnemonic: DECRPM
+Description: Report mode settings
+
+You can query setting of this with
+ CSI ? 67 $ p
+response CSI ? 67 ; Ps $ y
+ where Ps : 0 = unkown mode
+ 1 = set
+ 2 = reset
+ 3 = permanently set
+ 4 = permanently reset
+ This query is possible if terminal supports terminal interrogation commands
+ (== VT400 series or better).
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_terminals_news.txt>
+Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
+Status: DEC private; VT300
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSU Pn1 ; Pn2 ; Pn3 ; Pn4 $ z
+Mnemonic: DECERA
+Description: Erase rectangular area
+
+Erase the characters (and their visual attributes) in the specified
+rectangular area and replace each one with a space (decimal 32). Line
+attributes (for example, the attributes that specify double-wide,
+double-high characters) are not erased. The areas to erase are:
+
+Pn1 Top line
+Pn2 Left column
+Pn3 Bottom line
+Pn4 Right column
+
+Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
+Status: DEC private; VT400
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn1 ; Pn2 ; Pn3 ; Pn4 $ {
+Mnemonic: DECSERA
+Description: Selective erase rectangular area
+
+Erase all erasable characters from a specified rectangular area in
+page memory; a space character replaces erased character
+positions. The DECSERA control function does not change:
+
+* Visual attributes set by the select graphic rendition (SGR) function.
+* Protection attributes set by DECSCA.
+* Line attributes.
+
+The parameters are:
+Pn1 Top line
+Pn2 Left column
+Pn3 Bottom line
+Pn4 Right column
+
+Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
+Status: DEC private; VT400
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps $ |
+Mnemonic: DECSCPP
+Description: Set columns per page
+ The VT330 also implements the DECSCPP (set columns per page) as the
+ preferred new way; it does not reset the scrolling regions or clear
+ page memory as DECCOLM does.
+
+ Esc [ $ | sets each page to 80 columns
+ Esc [ 0 $ | sets each page to 80 columns
+ Esc [ 8 0 $ | sets each page to 80 columns
+ Esc [ 1 3 2 $ | sets each page to 132 columns
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt220_codes.txt>
+Status: DEC private; VT330
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps $ }
+Mnemonic: DECSASD
+Description: Select active status display
+
+Ps = 0 -> none
+Ps = 1 -> status
+
+This means CSI 0 $ } selects the main display, and CSI 1 $ } selects
+the status line.
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt220_codes.txt>
+Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
+Status: DEC private; VT320
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps $ ~
+Mnemonic: DECSSDT
+Desription: Select status display type
+
+Ps = 0 -> none
+Ps = 1 -> indicator (shows cursor position etc)
+Ps = 2 -> host writeable
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt220_codes.txt>
+Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
+Status: DEC private; VT320
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn & q
+Mnemonic: DECSNC
+Description: Set number of copies
+
+Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
+Status: DEC private; PPL3
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI ... & u
+Mnemonic: DECRQUPSS
+Description: Request user-preferred supplemental set
+
+Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
+Status: DEC private; VT400
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pe ; Pb ; Pr ; Pc ; Pp & w
+Mnemonic: DECLRP
+Description: Locator report
+
+When a selected trigger event occurs such as a button press or
+release, the terminal transmits a locator position report as follows.
+
+Pe is the event code
+Pb is the button code
+Pr is the row coordinate
+Pc is the column coordinate
+Pp is the third coordinate (page number)
+
+Pe, the event code indicates what event caused this report to be
+generated. The following event codes are defined:
+
+0 - request, the terminal received an explicit request
+ for a locator report, but the locator is unavailable
+1 - request, the terminal received an explicit
+ request for a locator report
+2 - left button down
+3 - left button up
+4 - middle button down
+5 - middle button up
+6 - right button down
+7 - right button up
+8 - fourth button down
+9 - fourth button up
+10 - locator outside filter rectangle
+
+Pb is the button code, ASCII decimal 0-15 indicating which buttons are
+down if any. The state of the four buttons on the locator correspond
+to the low four bits of the decimal value, "1" means button depressed
+
+0 - no buttons down
+1 - right
+2 - middle
+4 - left
+8 - fourth
+
+Pr is the row coordinate of the locator position in the page, encoded
+as an ASCII decimal value. If Pr is omitted, the locator position is
+undefined (outside the terminal window for example).
+
+Pc is the column coordinate of the locator position in the page,
+encoded as an ASCII decimal value. If Pc is omitted, the locator
+position is undefined (outside the terminal window for example).
+
+Pp is the page coordinate of the locator position encoded as an ASCII
+decimal value. The page coordinate may be omitted if the locator is on
+page one (the default).
+
+Each locator report includes both the specific transition which caused
+this event, and the current button state. This allows software to
+determine what event just occured and which buttons are down without
+keeping track of previous events or button state. In a multiprocess
+shared locator environment, an application may not know the previous
+button state. This dual reporting also allows applications to recover
+from lost locator reports.
+
+Each locator event generates a single report. In the rare situation
+where two events occur simultaneously (within a single sampling
+period), the terminal will report this as two separate events. The
+order of reporting shall be by increasing event code number (left
+button first).
+
+Locator events are queued in the keyboard input silo just like
+keystrokes. Each locator event occupies one position in the silo (the
+keyboard silo currently must have at least 9 positions). If the input
+silo becomes full, the locator and keyboard are locked until there is
+again room in the silo. The sequential order of keystroke and locator
+events is strictly maintained.
+
+It is the responsibility of the host to accept data fast enough to
+avoid locking the locator unintentionally. The limited buffering
+inside the terminal gives the host a little more time to process
+locator events smoothly.
+
+When the keyboard is locked, the "wait" indicator on the keyboard
+turns on. The keyboard is automatically locked any time the keyboard
+input silo is full. The keyboard can be locked explicitly using the
+keyboard action mode (KAM) control function.
+
+When the locator is locked, the terminal continues to track the
+locator, but the input cursor changes shape to appear as a wristwatch
+(or other shape indicating to wait). The wristwatch cursor indicates
+that locator button transitions will be ignored, but allows the user
+to continue positioning in anticipation of the locator being
+unlocked. The locator is automatically locked any time the input silo
+is full.
+
+Locator-ahead, analogous to keyboard type-ahead is supported by having
+each report include the locator position at the time of the event, and
+maintaining the sequential order of keystroke and locator events.
+
+A final implication of using the keyboard silo to buffer text locator
+events is that locator and keyboard input should be associated with
+the same session at all times. The session to receive these events is
+sometimes called the "active session" or "input focus". In a
+multi-session windowing environment, the input cursor is allowed to
+roam freely over the entire screen in response to locator
+movement. The input cursor is never occluded when locator reporting is
+enabled in one or more sessions. Each session enables locator
+reporting independently. The following cases describe the locator
+interaction with session viewports and scroll regions.
+
+1. The input cursor is within the active session's viewport. Pressing
+ a button on the locator sends alocator report when enabled.
+
+2. The input cursor is inside the active session's viewport, but
+ outside the range of defined coordinates for that session. Pressing
+ a button on the locator will generate a report with omitted
+ coordinates (position undefined). An example would be when the
+ input cursor is outside the active scrolling region, and the origin
+ mode has been set to relative. To use the locator to adjust scroll
+ margins, the origin mode must be absolute.
+
+3. The input cursor is not contained in any viewport. Pressing a
+ button on the locator will have no effect. To support "pop up"
+ menus anywhere on the screen, the entire screen must be a viewport
+ for at least one session.
+
+4. The input cursor is within a viewport of a session which is not the
+ active session. Pressing a button on the locator will normally make
+ the session containing the input cursor the active session
+ (possibly changing the occlusion order of viewports, and the shape
+ of the locator). This case is the responsibility of the "window
+ manager" which is free to define its own user interface. Two
+ recommendations are: (1) No locator report should be sent to the
+ previous active session, since the locator is not in its viewport;
+ and (2) If locator reporting is enabled in the new session, a
+ locator report should not be transmitted to avoid application side
+ affects when selecting another window.
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt_mouse.html>
+Status: DEC private; VT340?
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI ... & x
+Mnemonic: DECES
+Description: Enable session management
+
+Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
+Status: DEC private; VT400
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI ... ' q
+Mnemonic: DECSBCA
+Description: Select bar code attributes
+
+Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
+Status: DEC private; PPL2
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pt ; Pl ; Pb ; Pr ' w
+Mnemonic: DECEFR
+Description: Enable filter rectangle
+
+Filter Rectangles add filtered movement events to the list of locator
+transitions that can generate reports.
+
+Pt - Top boundary of filter rectangle
+Pl - Left boundary of filter rectangle
+Pb - Bottom boundary of filter rectangle
+Pr - Right boundary of filter rectangle
+
+The DECEFR control sequence defines the coordinates of a filter
+rectangle, and activates it. Anytime the locator is detected to be
+outside a filter rectangle, an outside rectangle event is generated
+and the rectangle is disabled. Filter rectangles are always treated as
+"one-shot" events. Defining a new rectangle re-activates it.
+
+Applications can re-define the rectangle at any time even if its
+already active. If a rectangle which does not contain the locator is
+specified, the terminal will generate an outside rectangle report
+immediately and deactivate it.
+
+Pt, Pl, Pb, and Pr are in coordinates units specified by the last
+DECELR sequence. The filter rectangle includes the boundaries (similar
+to other rectangular area operations). The origin is coordinate pair
+1:1 in the upper left corner. If any parameters are omitted, they are
+defaulted to the current locator position. Sending DECEFR with no
+parameters will cause the application to be notified for any locator
+movement ("unfiltered movement event").
+
+DECELR always cancels any previous filter rectangle definition. This
+gaurantees that when an application enables locator reports, there
+will never be an outstanding filter rectangle.
+
+If a filter rectangle lies on the edge of the defined coordinate space
+for the active session, and the locator crosses that edge, the
+rectangle may be triggered to send a report with omitted coordinates
+(locator position undefined).
+
+If the active session receives a filter rectangle with explicit
+coordinates while the locator is outside the defined coordinate space,
+the rectangle will be triggered to send a report with omitted
+coordinates.
+
+If the active session receives a filter rectangle with omitted
+coordinates (that is, use the current position) while the locator is
+outside the defined coordinate space (position undefined), the
+rectangle will be triggered the next time the locator is within the
+defined coordinate space.
+
+If a session which is not the active session receives a filter
+rectangle with explicit coordinates, it should trigger immediately
+with position undefined. If a session which is not the active session
+receives a rectangle with omitted coordinates, it should trigger the
+next time the locator is within the defined coordinate space for that
+session, which cannot happen until the session becomes active.
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt_mouse.html>
+Status: DEC private; VT340?
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps ; Pu ' z
+Mnemonic: DECELR
+Description: Enable locator reports
+
+Locator reporting can be selectively enabled from the host using a DEC
+private control sequence. When disabled (the power up default), the
+locator cursor does not appear, and the locator buttons are
+inactive. When enabled, the locator cursor is visible, and the
+terminal tracks the locator locally with no host
+intervention. Individual locator events such as locator button
+transitions or movement may be programmed to send locator reports to
+the host.
+
+Ps may assume the following values
+
+0 locator disabled (default)
+
+1 locator reports enabled
+
+2 one shot (allow one report, then disable)
+
+Pu specifies the coordinate units for locator reports
+
+0 (or omitted) default to character cells
+
+1 device physical pixels
+
+2 character cells
+
+One shot mode is provided for applications that desire simple graphics
+input similar to Tektronix GIN mode (no unsolicited reports). If
+parameter value 2 is selected, the next trigger event that occurs will
+generate a single locator report. No further locator reports will
+occur (the locator will be disabled), until another DECELR sequence is
+received.
+
+The coordinate units for locator position reports may be selected to
+either of two coordinate systems used by terminal software at the
+lowest level. Physical pixels is the "least common denominator", and
+is useful for computing sixel positions.
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt_mouse.html>
+Status: DEC private; VT340?
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI P ... P ' {
+Mnemonic: DECSLE
+Description: Select locator events
+
+The locator events which are allowed to generate unsolicited reports
+may be individually selected using the Select Locator Events
+control. The locator is capable of reporting both up and down
+transitions for those situations where the exact sequence of button
+activiations is significant. This control allows application software
+to select which events it wants reported.
+
+P...P is one or more selective parameters which may assume the
+following values:
+
+0 respond only to explicit host requests
+ (default, also cancels any pending filter rectangle)
+1 report button down transitions
+2 do not report button down transitions
+3 report button up transitions
+4 do not report button up transitions
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt_mouse.html>
+Status: DEC private; VT340?
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps ' |
+Mnemonic: DECRQLP
+Description: Request locator position
+
+The host may explicitly request a locator position report any time
+locator reporting is enabled (DECELR). Upon receiving such a request,
+the terminal will immediately send a single locator report (DECLRP)
+with event code 1 indicating the current locator position.
+
+If the session receiving the request is the active session, but the
+locator is not within the defined coordinate range for that session,
+the terminal will respond with omitted coordinates (locator position
+undefined).
+
+If the session receiving the request is not currently active (the
+locator is being used in another session), the report will specify
+event code 0 (locator unavailable). Locator state from the active
+session should not be made available to inactive sessions.
+
+If the locator is disabled (DECELR), the terminal should still respond
+with event code 0 (to avoid timing out the application).
+
+Ps:
+0 (or omitted) default to 1
+1 transmit a single DECLRP locator report all others ignored
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt_mouse.html>
+Status: DEC private; VT340?
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI ... ' }
+Mnemonic: DECIC
+Description: Insert column
+
+Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
+Status: DEC private; VT400
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI ... ' ~
+Mnemonic: DECDC
+Description: Delete column
+
+Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
+Status: DEC private; VT400
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI ... * q
+Mnemonic: DECSRC
+Descripton: Secure reset confirmation
+
+Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
+Status: DEC private; VT400
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps * x
+Mnemonic: DECSACE
+Description: Select attribute change extent
+
+Select which character positions within a rectangular area can have
+their attributes changed or reversed. The DECSACE control function
+affects the rectangular area control functions for changing and
+reversing attributes (DECCARA and DECRARA).
+
+The Ps parameter specifies what character positions are affected. 0 or
+1 indicates a stream of character positions that begins in the first
+position specified in the DECCARA or DECRARA control function, and
+ends with the second one that is specified. A 2 indicates a
+rectangular area of character positions; the DECCARA and DECRARA
+control functions specify the upper left and lower right corners of
+the area.
+
+Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
+Status: DEC private; VT400
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn1 ; Pn2 ; Pn3 ; Pn4 ; Pn5 ; Pn6 * y
+Mnemonic: DECRQCRA
+Description: Request checksum of rectangular area
+
+Request a memory checksum of a rectangular area on a specified
+page. The terminal returns a checksum report (DECCKSR) in
+response. DECRQCRA also works on the status line.
+
+Parameters:
+
+Pn1 A numeric label you give to identify the checksum request
+(DECCKSR returns this number).
+
+Pn2 The number of the page on which the rectangular area is
+located. If Pn2 is 0 or omitted, the terminal ignores the remaining
+parameters and reports a checksum for all pages in page memory. If
+<n2> is more than the number of pages, Reflection does a checksum on
+the last page.
+
+Pn3 to Pn6 define the area to be checksummed:
+
+Pn3 Top row
+Pn4 Right column
+Pn5 Bottom row
+Pn6 Left column
+
+If Pn3 .. Pn6 are omitted, the entire page is checksummed. The
+co-ordinates are affected by DECOM.
+
+Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
+Status: DEC private; VT400
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Pn * z
+Mnemonic: DECINVM
+Description: Invoke Macro
+
+Invoke a stored macro. Pn is the macro ID number used in DECDMAC. If
+Pn is not associated with a particular macro, Reflection ignores this
+control function. If a macro definition includes control functions,
+these functions remain in effect after the macro is invoked.
+
+Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
+Status: DEC private; VT400
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI ... * {
+Mnemonic: DECMSR
+Description: Macro space report
+
+Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
+Status: DEC private; VT400
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI ... * |
+Mnemonic: DECSNLS
+Description: Select number of lines per screen
+
+Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
+Status: DEC private; VT400
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI ... * }
+Mnemonic: DECLFKC
+Description: Local function key control
+
+Source: <URL: http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
+Status: DEC private; VT400
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI ... + p
+Mnemonic: DECSR
+Description: Secure reset
+
+Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
+Status: DEC private; VT400
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI ... + q
+Mnemonic: DECELF
+Description: Enable local functions
+
+Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
+Status: DEC private; VT400
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI ... + r
+Mnemonic: DECSMKR
+Description: Select modifier key reporting
+
+Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
+Status: DEC private; VT400
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI ... + v
+Mnemonic: DECMM
+Description: Memory management
+
+Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/ctrlseq_dec.html>
+Status: DEC private; PPL3
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: CSI Ps / y
+Description: xwsh command
+
+xwsh command. The first parameter to this escape sequence is the
+particular command described in the table that follows. Each command
+has different numbers of arguments which are described below.
+
+2 Textport init. Reset xwsh to be 40 rows by 80 columns. Reset the
+ colors to the default colors. Reset any graphics rendition. Clear
+ out the retain buffer. Home the cursor.
+
+3 Push the window. Depending on the window manager, this may or may
+ not have any affect.
+
+4 Pop the window. Depending on the window manager, this may or may not
+ have any affect.
+
+14 History init. Clear out the retain buffer. Home the cursor.
+
+16 Reset bindable function keys.
+
+15 Initialize bindable function keys to defaults.
+
+101 Set the text color by using a 3.3 compatible index.
+
+102 Set the page color by using a 3.3 compatible index.
+
+103 Set the bold color by using a 3.3 compatible index.
+
+104 Set the cursor page color by using a 3.3 compatible index.
+
+111 Set the selection colors by using 3.3 compatible indices. This
+ sequence takes three parameters. The first is 111. The second
+ parameter is the selection text color, the third is the selection
+ page color.
+
+203 Set the window size by row and column. This sequence takes three
+ parameters. The first is 203. The second parameter is the number
+ of rows to use. The third parameter is the number of columns to
+ use.
+
+204 Set the window size, in pixels. This sequence takes three
+ parameters. The first is 204. The second parameter is the new
+ width. The third parameter is the new height. The width and height
+ are rounded up to the nearest font boundaries.
+
+205 Set the window position, in pixels. The lower left corner of the
+ display is specified as 0,0.
+
+Source: IRIX 6.5.5 xwsh(1G)
+Status: SGI private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: ST or ESC \
+Mnemonic: ST
+Description: String terminator
+
+ST is used as the closing delimiter of a control string opened by
+APPLICATION PROGRAM COMMAND (APC), DEVICE CONTROL STRING (DCS),
+OPERATING SYSTEM COMMAND (OSC), PRIVACY MESSAGE (PM), or START OF
+STRING (SOS).
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.143
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: OSC or ESC ]
+Mnemonic: OSC
+Description: Operating system command
+
+OSC is used as the opening delimiter of a control string for operating
+system use. The command string following may consist of a sequence of
+bit combinations in the range 00/08 to 00/13 and 02/00 to 07/14. The
+control string is closed by the terminating delimiter STRING
+TERMINATOR (ST). The interpretation of the command string depends on
+the relevant operating system.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.89
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: OSC 0 ; txt BEL (or ST)
+Description: Set icon name and window title
+
+Source: Linux console_codes(4)
+Status: xterm private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: OSC 1 ; txt BEL (or ST)
+Description: Set icon name
+
+Source: Linux console_codes(4)
+Status: xterm private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: OSC 2 ; txt BEL (or ST)
+Description: Set window title
+
+Source: Linux console_codes(4)
+Status: xterm private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: OSC 4 6 ; name BEL (or ST)
+Description: Set log file
+
+Change log file to name (normally disabled by a compile-time option)
+
+Source: Linux console_codes(4)
+Status: xterm private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: OSC 5 0 ; fn BEl (or ST)
+Description: Set font
+
+Source: Linux console_codes(4)
+Status: xterm private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: OSC P nrrggbb
+Description: Set palette
+
+set palette, with parameter given in 7 hexadecimal digits after the
+final P :-(. Here n is the color (0-16), and rrggbb indicates the
+red/green/blue values (0-255).
+
+Source: Linux console_codes(4)
+Status: Linux private; should be terminated with ST
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Dequence: OSC R
+Description: Reset palette
+
+Source: Linux console_codes(4)
+Status: Linux private; should be terminated with ST
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: PM or ESC ^
+Mnemonic: PM
+Description: Privacy message
+
+PM is used as the opening delimiter of a control string for privacy
+message use. The command string following may consist of a sequence of
+bit combinations in the range 00/08 to 00/13 and 02/00 to 07/14. The
+control string is closed by the terminating delimiter STRING
+TERMINATOR (ST). The interpretation of the command string depends on
+the relevant privacy discipline.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 8.3.94
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Sequence: APC or ESC _
+Mnemonic: APC
+Description: Application program command
+
+APC is used as the opening delimiter of a control string for
+application program use. The command string following may consist of
+bit combinations in the range 00/08 to 00/13 and 02/00 to 07/14. The
+control string is closed by the terminating delimiter STRING
+TERMINATOR (ST). The interpretation of the command string depends on
+the relevant application program.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 8.3.2
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Section: *** Modes (for SM and RM) ***
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: 1
+Mnemonic: GATM
+Description: Guarded area transfer mode
+
+GUARD (reset):
+Only the contents of unguarded areas in an eligible area are
+transmitted or transferred.
+
+ALL (set):
+The contents of guarded as well as of unguarded areas in an eligible
+area are transmitted or transferred.
+
+NOTE
+No control functions are affected.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 7.2.7
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: 2
+Mnemonic: KAM
+Description: Keyboard action mode
+
+ENABLED (reset):
+All or part of the manual input facilities are enabled to be used.
+
+DISABLED (set):
+All or part of the manual input facilities are disabled.
+
+NOTE
+No control functions are affected.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 7.2.11
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: 3
+Mnemonic: CRM
+Description: Control representation mode
+
+CONTROL (reset):
+All control functions are performed as defined; the way formator
+functions are processed depends on the setting of the FORMAT EFFECTOR
+ACTION MODE (FEAM). A device may choose to image the graphical
+representations of control functions in addition to performing them.
+
+GRAPHIC (set):
+All control functions, except RESET MODE (RM), are treated as graphic
+characters. A device may choose to perform some control functions in
+addition to storing them and imaging their graphical representations.
+
+NOTE
+All control functions, except RM, are affected.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 7.2.2
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: 4
+Mnemonic: IRM
+Description: Insertion replacement mode
+
+REPLACE (reset):
+The graphic symbol of a graphic character or of a control function,
+for which a graphical representation is required, replaces (or,
+depending upon the implementation, is combined with) the graphic
+symbol imaged at the active presentation position.
+
+INSERT (set):
+The graphic symbol of a graphic character or of a control function,
+for which a graphical representation is required, is inserted at the
+active presentation position.
+
+NOTE
+Only control functions for which a graphical representation is
+required are affected.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 7.2.10
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: 5
+Mnemonic: SRTM
+Description: Status report transfer mode
+
+NORMAL (reset):
+Status reports in the form of DEVICE CONTROL STRINGs (DCS) are not
+generated automatically.
+
+DIAGNOSTIC (set):
+Status reports in the form of DEVICE CONTROL STRINGs (DCS) are
+included in every data stream transmitted or transferred.
+
+NOTE
+No control functions are affected.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 7.2.16
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: 6
+Mnemonic: ERM
+Description: Erasure mode
+
+PROTECT (reset):
+Only the contents of unprotected areas are affected by an erasure
+control function.
+
+ALL (set):
+The contents of protected as well as of unprotected areas are affected
+by an erasure control function.
+
+NOTE
+Control functions affected are: EA, ECH, ED, EF, EL.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 7.2.4
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: 7
+Mnemonic: VEM
+Description: Line editing mode
+
+FOLLOWING (reset):
+
+If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to PRESENTATION, a
+line insertion causes the contents of the active line (the line that
+contains the active presentation position) and of the following lines
+in the presentation component to be shifted in the direction of the
+line progression; a line deletion causes the contents of the lines
+following the active line to be shifted in the direction opposite to
+that of the line progression.
+
+If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to DATA, a line
+insertion causes the contents of the active line (the line that
+contains the active data position) and of the following lines in the
+data component to be shifted in the direction of the line progression;
+a line deletion causes the contents of the lines following the active
+line to be shifted in the direction opposite to that of the line
+progression.
+
+PRECEDING (set):
+If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to PRESENTATION, a
+line insertion causes the contents of the active line (the line that
+contains the active presentation position) and of the preceding lines
+to be shifted in the direction opposite to that of the line
+progression; a line deletion causes the contents of the lines
+preceding the active line to be shifted in the direction of the line
+progression.
+
+If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to DATA, a line
+insertion causes the contents of the active line (the line that
+contains the active data position) and of the preceding lines to be
+shifted in the direction opposite to that of the line progression; a
+line deletion causes the contents of the lines preceding the active
+line to be shifted in the direction of the line progression.
+
+NOTE
+Control functions affected are: DL, IL.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 7.2.19
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: 8
+Mnemonic: BDSM
+Description: Bi-directional support mode
+
+EXPLICIT (reset):
+Control functions are performed in the data component or in the
+presentation component, depending on the setting of the DEVICE
+COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM).
+
+IMPLICIT (set):
+Control functions are performed in the data component. All
+bi-directional aspects of data are handled by the device itself.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 7.2.1
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: 9
+Mnemonic: DCSM
+Description: Device component select mode
+
+PRESENTATION (reset):
+Certain control functions are performed in the presentation
+component. The active presentation position (or the active line, where
+applicable) in the presentation component is the reference position
+against which the relevant control functions are performed.
+
+DATA (set):
+Certain control functions are performed in the data component. The
+active data position (or the active line, where applicable) in the
+data component is the reference position against which the relevant
+control functions are performed.
+
+NOTE
+Control functions affected are: CPR, CR, DCH, DL, EA, ECH, ED, EF, EL,
+ICH, IL, LF, NEL, RI, SLH, SLL, SPH, SPL.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 7.2.3
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: 10
+Mnemonic: HEM
+Description: Character editing mode
+
+FOLLOWING (reset):
+If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to PRESENTATION, a
+character insertion causes the contents of the active presentation
+position and of the following character positions in the presentation
+component to be shifted in the direction of the character path; a
+character deletion causes the contents of the character positions
+following the active presentation position to be shifted in the
+direction opposite to that of the character path.
+
+If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to DATA, a character
+insertion causes the contents of the active data position and of the
+following character positions in the data component to be shifted in
+the direction of the character progression; a character deletion
+causes the contents of the character positions following the active
+data position to be shifted in the direction opposite to that of the
+character progression.
+
+PRECEDING:
+If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to PRESENTATION, a
+character insertion causes the contents of the active presentation
+position and of the following character positions in the presentation
+component to be shifted in the direction opposite to that of the
+character path; a character deletion causes the contents of the
+character positions following the active presentation position to be
+shifted in the direction of the character path.
+
+If the DEVICE COMPONENT SELECT MODE (DCSM) is set to DATA, a character
+insertion causes the contents of the active data position and of
+preceding character positions in the data component to be shifted in
+the direction opposite to that of the character progression; a
+character deletion causes the contents of the character positions
+preceding the active data position to be shifted in the direction of
+the character progression.
+
+NOTE
+Control functions affected are: DCH, ICH.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 7.2.9
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: 11
+Mnemonic: PUM
+Description: Positioning unit mode
+
+CHARACTER (reset):
+The unit for numeric parameters of the positioning format effectors is
+one character position.
+
+SIZE (set):
+The unit for numeric parameters of the positioning format effectors is
+that established by the parameter value of SELECT SIZE UNIT (SSU).
+
+NOTE 1
+Control functions affected are: CUB, CUD, CUF, CUU, HPA, HPB, HPR,
+HVP, SLH, SLL, SSU, VPA, VPB, VPR..
+
+NOTE 2
+As the default parameter value of the control function SELECT SIZE
+UNIT (SSU) is CHARACTER, this mode is redundant and should no longer
+be used.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. F.4.1
+Status: standard; deprecated
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: 12
+Mnemonic: SRM
+Description: Send/receive mode
+
+MONITOR (reset):
+Data which are locally entered are immediately imaged.
+
+SIMULTANEOUS:
+Local input facilities are logically disconnected from the output
+mechanism; only data which are sent to the device are imaged.
+
+NOTE
+No control functions are affected.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 7.2.15
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: 13
+Mnemonic: FEAM
+Description: Format effector action mode
+
+EXECUTE (reset):
+Formator functions are performed immediately and may be stored in
+addition to being performed.
+
+STORE (set):
+Formator functions are stored but not performed. In this case, the
+specified action is intended to be performed by another device when
+the associated data are transmitted or transferred.
+
+NOTE
+Control functions affected are: BPH, BS, CR, DTA, FF, FNT, GCC, GSM,
+GSS, HPA, HPB, HPR, HT, HTJ, HTS, HVP, JFY, NEL, PEC, PFS, PLD, PLU,
+PPA, PPB, PPR, PTX, QUAD, RI, SACS, SAPV, SCO, SCS, SGR, SHS, SLH,
+SLL, SLS, SPD, SPI, SPQR, SRCS, SRS, SSU, SSW, STAB, SVS, TAC, TALE,
+TATE, TBC, TCC, TSS, VPA, VPB, VPR, VTS.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 7.2.5
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: 14
+Mnemonic: FETM
+Description: Format effector transfer mode
+
+INSERT (reset):
+Formator functions may be inserted in a data stream to be transmitted
+or in data to be transferred to an auxiliary input/output device.
+
+EXCLUDE:
+No formator functions other than those received while the FORMAT
+EFFECTOR ACTION MODE (FEAM) is set to STORE are included in a
+transmitted data stream or in data transferred to an auxiliary
+input/output device.
+
+NOTE
+No control functions are affected.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 7.2.6
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: 15
+Mnemonic: MATM
+Description: Multiple area transfer mode
+
+SINGLE (reset):
+Only the contents of the selected area which contains the active
+presentation position are eligible to be transmitted or transferred.
+
+MULTIPLE (set):
+The contents of all selected areas are eligible to be transmitted or
+transferred.
+
+NOTE
+No control functions are affected.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 7.2.12
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: 16
+Mnemonic: TTM
+Description: Transfer termination mode
+
+CURSOR (reset):
+Only the contents of the character positions preceding the active
+presentation position in the presentation component are eligible to be
+transmitted or transferred.
+
+ALL (set):
+The contents of character positions preceding, following, and at the
+active presentation position are eligible to be transmitted or
+transferred.
+
+NOTE
+No control functions are affected.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 7.2.18
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: 17
+Mnemonic: SATM
+Description: Selected area transfer mode
+
+SELECT (reset):
+Only the contents of selected areas are eligible to be transmitted or
+transferred.
+
+ALL (set):
+The contents of all character positions, irrespective of any
+explicitly defined selected areas, are eligible to be transmitted or
+transferred.
+
+NOTE
+No control functions are affected.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 7.2.14
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: 18
+Mnemonic: TSM
+Description: Tabulation stop mode
+
+MULTIPLE (reset):
+Character tabulation stops in the presentation component are set or
+cleared in the active line (the line that contains the active
+presentation position) and in the corresponding character positions of
+the preceding lines and of the following lines.
+
+SINGLE (set):
+Character tabulation stops in the presentation component are set or
+cleared in the active line only.
+
+NOTE
+Control functions affected are: CTC, DL, HTS, IL, TBC.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 7.2.17
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: 19
+Mnemonic: EBM
+Description: Editing boundary mode
+
+The mode EDITING BOUNDARY MODE (EBM) the use of which was already
+declared deprecated in the fourth Edition of this Standard has now
+been removed.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. F.5.1
+Status: standard; obsolete
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: 20
+Mnemonic: LNM
+Description: Line feed/new line mode
+
+The mode LINE FEED/NEW LINE MODE (LF/NL) the use of which was already
+declared deprecated in the fourth Edition of this Standard has now
+been removed.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. F.5.2
+
+set: Causes a received LF, FF, or VT code to move the cursor to the
+first column of the next line. RETURN transmits both a CR and a LF
+code.
+
+reset: Causes a received LF, FF, or VT code to move the cursor to the
+next line in the current column. RETURN transmits a CR code only.
+
+Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/docs/vt220-rm/chapter4.html>
+Status: standard; obsolete
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: 21
+Mnemonic: GRCM
+Description: Graphic rendition combination mode
+
+REPLACING (reset):
+Each occurrence of the control function SELECT GRAPHIC RENDITION (SGR)
+cancels the effect of any preceding occurrence. Any graphic rendition
+aspects that are to remain unchanged after an occurrence of SGR have
+to be re-specified by that SGR.
+
+CUMULATIVE (set):
+Each occurrence of the control function SELECT GRAPHIC RENDITION (SGR)
+causes only those graphic rendition aspects to be changed that are
+specified by that SGR. All other graphic rendition aspects remain
+unchanged.
+
+NOTE
+Control function affected is SGR.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. 7.2.8
+Status: standard
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: 22
+Mnemonic: ZDM
+Description: Zero default mode
+
+ZERO (reset):
+A parameter value of 0 of a control function means the number 0.
+
+DEFAULT (set):
+A parameter value of 0 represents a default parameter value which may
+be different from 0.
+
+NOTE 1
+This mode was provided for implementations of the first edition of
+this Standard which specified that "an empty parameter sub-string or a
+parameter sub-string which consists of bit combinations 03/00 only
+represents a default value which depends on the control function".
+
+For numeric parameters which are expressed in units established by the
+parameter value of SELECT SIZE UNIT (SSU) the value 0 could then be
+specified. For numeric parameters which are effectively repeat counts,
+a 0 parameter value corresponded to a "no-op". In either instance,
+non-negative computed numeric parameter values might have been used
+without treating 0 as a special (unusable) case.
+
+Where an explicit parameter value was not used, implementors were
+urged to omit a parameter value (use an empty parameter sub-string) to
+imply a default parameter value.
+
+Control functions affected are: CBT, CHA, CHT, CNL, CPL, CPR, CUB,
+CUD, CUF, CUP, CUU, CVT, DCH, DL, ECH, GSM, HPA, HPB, HPR, HVP, ICH,
+IL, NP, PP, PPA, PPB, PPR, REP, SD, SL, SR, SU, TCC, VPA, VPB, VPR.
+
+NOTE 2
+Since the publication of the first edition of this Standard in 1976
+almost 15 years have expired. The use of this mode should no longer be
+required because the definition of default parameter values has been
+changed.
+
+Source: ECMA-48 5th Ed. F.4.2
+Status: standard; deprecated
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: 30
+Description: Display disable mode
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.wyse.com/service/support/kbase/SEQwt.asp?Q=9>
+Status: Wyse private; clashes with ECMA-48
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: 31
+Description: Status line display mode
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.wyse.com/service/support/kbase/SEQwt.asp?Q=9>
+Status: Wyse private; clashes with ECMA-48
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: 32
+Description: Steady cursor mode
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.wyse.com/service/support/kbase/SEQwt.asp?Q=9>
+Status: Wyse private; clashes with ECMA-48
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: 33
+Mnemonic: WYSTCURM
+Description: Wyse steady cursor mode
+
+Cursor steady: <esc> [ 33 h
+Cursor blinking: <esc> [ 33 l (that's a small ell, not eye)
+
+Source:
+ <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/ansi_dec_controls_news.txt>
+Status: Wyse private; clashes with ECMA-48
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: 34
+Mnemonic: WYULCURM
+Description: Wyse underline cursor mode
+
+Cursor block: <esc> [ 34 l (ell)
+Cursor line: <esc> [ 34 h
+
+Source:
+ <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/ansi_dec_controls_news.txt>
+Status: Wyse private; clashes with ECMA-48
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: 35
+Description: Width change clear mode
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.wyse.com/service/support/kbase/SEQwt.asp?Q=9>
+Status: Wyse private; clashes with ECMA-48
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: 53
+Description: 80/132 column switch
+
+set: 132 columns
+reset: 80 columns
+
+Source: jaltman@watsun.cc.columbia.edu (Jeffrey Altman) in comp.terminals
+ <7svop9$f9u$1@newsmaster.cc.columbia.edu>
+Status: Siemens 97801-5xx private; clashes with ECMA-48
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: <0
+Description: Roll mode
+
+When reset, commands that would move the cursor beyond the 24th line
+of the screen cause the screen to scroll. When set, such commands
+cause the cursor to move to the top line.
+
+Source: Dasher D410 and D460 Display Terminals User's Manual
+ <URL:http://vt100.net/dg/dasher_d410_d460_users_manual.pdf>
+Status: Data General private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: <1
+Description: Blink mode
+
+When set, the blink attribute in CSR will be ignored.
+
+Source: Dasher D410 and D460 Display Terminals User's Manual
+ <URL:http://vt100.net/dg/dasher_d410_d460_users_manual.pdf>
+Status: Data General private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: <2
+Description: Horizontal scroll mode
+
+set: Horizontal scroll enabled
+reset: Horizontal scroll disabled
+
+Source: Dasher D410 and D460 Display Terminals User's Manual
+ <URL:http://vt100.net/dg/dasher_d410_d460_users_manual.pdf>
+Status: Data General private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: <3
+Description: DG/ANSI mode
+
+set: Use ANSI command sequences.
+reset: Use DG command sequences.
+
+Source: Dasher D410 and D460 Display Terminals User's Manual
+ <URL:http://vt100.net/dg/dasher_d410_d460_users_manual.pdf>
+Status: Data General private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: <4
+Description: Forms mode
+
+When reset, a Local Print command will print all characters. When
+set, only characters displayed at full intensity will be printed.
+
+Source: Dasher D410 and D460 Display Terminals User's Manual
+ <URL:http://vt100.net/dg/dasher_d410_d460_users_manual.pdf>
+Status: Data General private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: <5
+Description: Margins mode
+
+In the reset state, editing operations operate irrespective of
+margins; in the set state, editing operations take place within the
+margins. The commands affected include: IL, ED, EL, ICH DCH.
+
+Source: Dasher D410 and D460 Display Terminals User's Manual
+ <URL:http://vt100.net/dg/dasher_d410_d460_users_manual.pdf>
+Status: Data General private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: =6
+Description: Lock display
+
+Lock display. When set, this mode causes xwsh to keep its display set
+to the current location in the retain buffer. Any scrolling
+activities, line insert/deletes will not affect the retain buffer that
+is outside of the display. When reset, scrolling off the bottom will
+move the display to track the bottom of the retain buffer. When the
+lock is set, the scroll bar is disabled, as well as any extend
+selection mechanisms that might cause a scroll. The normal mode is in
+the reset state, but the standard terminfo for iris-ansi causes visual
+programs to lock the display.
+
+Source: IRIX 6.5.5 xwsh(1G)
+Status: SGI private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: =9
+Description: Enable visual bell
+
+Enable visual bell. When set, xwsh will flash the display when it
+receives an octal 7 instead of ringing the bell. When reset it asks X
+to ring the bell.
+
+Source: IRIX 6.5.5 xwsh(1G)
+Status: SGI private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: =12
+Description: Overlay mode
+
+Overlay mode. When set, xwsh moves its display into the overlay
+planes. When reset, xwsh displays in the default visual. This is no
+longer functional as of IRIX 4.0. The escape sequence is now ignored.
+
+Source: IRIX 6.5.5 xwsh(1G)
+Status: SGI private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?1
+Mnemonic: DECCKM
+Description: Cursor key mode
+
+ This is a private parameter to the SM and RM control requences. This
+ mode is only effective when the terminal is in keypad application mode
+ (DECPAM) and the ANSI/VT52 mode (DECANM) is set. Under these
+ conditions, if this mode is reset, the cursor keys will send ANSI
+ cursor control commands. If setm the cursor keys will send application
+ function commands.
+
+Source: <URL: http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>
+
+DECCKM (default off): When set, the cursor keys send an ESC O prefix,
+rather than ESC [.
+
+Source: Linux console_codes(4)
+Status: DEC private; VT100
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?2
+Mnemonic: DECANM
+Description: ANSI/VT52 Mode
+
+ This is a private parameter to the SM and RM control sequences. The
+ reset state causes only VT52 compatible escape sequences to be
+ recognized. The set state causes only ANSI compatible escape sequences
+ to be recognized.
+
+Source: <URL: http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>
+Status: DEC private; VT100
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?3
+Mnemonic: DECCOLM
+Description: Column mode
+
+ This is a private parameter to the SM and RM control sequences. The
+ reset state causes an 80 column screen to be used. The set state
+ causes a 132 column screen to be used.
+
+Source: <URL: http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>
+
+NOTE: When the terminal receives the sequence, the screen is erased
+and the cursor moves to the home position. This also sets the scrolling
+region for full screen (24 lines).
+
+Source: <http://vt100.net/docs/vt220-rm/chapter4.html#S4.6.10>
+
+If you change the DECCOLM setting, the terminal:
+ + Sets the left, right, top and bottom scrolling margins to their default
+ positions.
+ + Erases all data in page memory, unless DECNCSM is set; then, the page
+ is not erased.
+
+DECCOLM resets vertical split screen mode (DECLRMM) to unavailable.
+
+DECCOLM clears data from the status line if the status line is set to
+host-writable.
+
+Source: <http://vt100.net/docs/vt520-rm/ek-vt520-rm.pdf>
+Status: DEC private; VT100
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?4
+Mnemonic: DECSCLM
+Description: Scrolling mode
+
+ This is a private parameter to RM and SM control sequences. The reset
+ state causes scrolls to "jump" instantaneuously one line at a time.
+ The set state causes the scrolls to be "smooth", and scrolls at a
+ maximum rate of six lines/sec.
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>
+Status: DEC private; VT100
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?5
+Mnemonic: DECSCNM
+Description: Screen mode
+
+ This is a private parameter to RM and SM control sequences. The reset
+ state causes the screen to be black with white characters; the set
+ state causes the screen to be white with black characters.
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>
+Status: DEC private; VT100
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?6
+Mnemoic: DECOM
+Description: Origin mode
+
+ This is a private parameter to SM and RM control sequences. The reset
+ state causes the origin (or home position) to be the upper left
+ character position of the screen. Line and column numbers are,
+ therefore, independent of current margin settings. The cursor may be
+ positioned outside the margins with a cursor position (CUP) or
+ horizontal and vertical position (HVP) control.
+
+ The set state causes the origin to be at the upper left character
+ position within the current margins. Line and column numbers are,
+ therefore, relative to the current margin settings. The cursor cannot
+ be positioned outside of the margins.
+
+ The cursor is moved to the new home position when this mode is set or
+ reset. Lines and columns are numbered consecutively, with the origin
+ being line 1, column 1.
+
+ The scroll margins are set using the DECSTBM control sequence.
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>
+Status: DEC private; VT100
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?7
+Mnemonic: DECAWM
+Description: Autowrap mode
+
+ This is a private parameter to the SM and RM control sequences. The
+ reset state prevents the cursor from moving when characters are
+ recieved while at the right margin. The set state causes these
+ characters to advance to the next line, causing a scroll up if required
+ and permitted. See MODES, SM, and RM.
+
+Source: <URL: http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>
+Status: DEC private; VT100
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?8
+Mnemonic: DECARM
+Description: Auto repeat mode
+
+ This is a private parameter to the SM and RM control sequences. The
+ reset state causes no keyboard keys to auto-repeat, the set state
+ causes most of them to.
+
+Source: <URL: http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>
+Status: DEC private; VT100
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?9
+Mnemonic: DECINLM
+Description: Interlace mode
+
+ This is a private parameter to the RM and SM control sequences. The
+ reset state (non-interlace) causes the video processor to display 240
+ scan lines per frame. The set state causes the video processor to
+ display 480 scan lines per screen. See MODES, RM, and SM.
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/vt100_codes_news.txt>
+Status: DEC private; VT100
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?9
+Description: X10 mouse reporting
+
+Parameters (such as pointer position and button number) for all mouse
+tracking escape sequences generated by xterm encode numeric parameters
+in a single character as value+32. For example, ! specifies the value
+1. The upper left character position on the terminal is denoted as 1,1.
+
+X10 compatibility mode sends an escape sequence only on button press,
+encoding the location and the mouse button pressed. It is enabled by
+specifying parameter 9 to DECSET. On button press, xterm sends CSI M
+CbCxCy (6 characters). Cb is button-1. Cx and Cy are the x and y coor-
+dinates of the mouse when the button was pressed.
+
+Source: XFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05
+Status: xterm private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?10
+Mnemonic: DECEDM
+Description: Editing mode
+
+set -> Edit
+reset -> Interactive
+
+Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pC26
+Status: DEC private; VT131
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?11
+Mnemonic: DECLTM
+Description: Line Transmit mode
+
+set -> On
+reset -> Off
+
+Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pC26
+Status: DEC private; VT131
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?13
+Mnemonic: DECSCFDM
+Description: Space compression/field delimiter mode
+
+set -> On
+reset -> Off
+
+Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pC26
+Status: DEC private; VT131
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?14
+Mnemonic: DECTEM
+Description: Transmit execution mode
+
+set -> Immediate
+reset -> Deferred
+
+Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pC26
+Status: DEC private; VT131
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?16
+Mnemonic: DECEKEM
+Description: Edit key execution mode
+
+set -> Immediate
+reset -> Deferred
+
+Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pC26
+Status: DEC private; VT131
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?18
+Mnemonic: DECPFF
+Description: Print form feed mode
+
+set: Selects form feed (FF) as print termination character. The
+terminal transmits this character to the printer after each print
+screen operation.
+
+reset: Select no termination character. The terminal does not transmit
+a form feed (FF) to the printer after each print screen operation.
+
+Source: <URL:http://vt100.net/docs/vt220-rm/chapter4.html>
+Status: DEC private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?19
+Mnemonic: DECPEX
+Description: Printer extent
+
+set -> screen
+reset -> scrolling region
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt220_codes.txt>
+Status: DEC private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?24
+Description: Print density
+
+set -> Sets printing to low density operation
+reset -> Sets printing to high density operation
+
+Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE21
+Status: DEC private, LA12
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?25
+Mnemonic: DECTCEM
+Description: Text cursor enable mode
+
+set -> visible
+reset -> invisible
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt220_codes.txt>
+Status: DEC private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?27
+Mnemonic: DECPSP
+Description: Proportional spacing
+
+set -> sets proportional spacing
+reset -> clears proportional spacing
+
+Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE99
+Status: DEC private; LQP02
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?29
+Mnemonic: DECPSM
+Description: Pitch select mode
+
+set -> Sets pitch select mode to current DPS pitches mode
+reset -> Sets pitch select mode to all pitches mode
+
+Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56
+Status: DEC private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?30
+Description: Scroll bar mode
+
+set -> Show scrollbar
+reset -> Don't show scrollbar
+
+Source: XFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05
+Status: rxvt private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?34
+Mnemonic: DECRLM
+Description: Writing
+
+set -> right to left
+reset -> left to right
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt220_codes.txt>
+Status: DEC private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?35
+Mnemonic: DECHEBM
+
+(Kermit) Invoke macro: KEYBOARDS KEYBOARDR
+ +++ VT320 DEC supplements for Hebrew systems adapted
+ from VT420-Hebrew terminals, invokes a new
+ keyboard map. Kermit invokes macros above.
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt220_codes.txt>
+Status: DEC private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?35
+Description: Shifted key-functions
+
+set -> Enable shifted key-functions
+reset -> Disable shifted key-functions
+
+Source: XFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05
+Status: rxvt private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?36
+Mnemonic: DECHEM
+Description: Hebrew encoding
+
+set -> Multinational
+reset -> Hebrew NRC
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt220_codes.txt>
+Status: DEC private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?38
+Mnemonic: DECTEK
+Description: Graphics (Tek)
+
+set -> Enter Tektromix mode
+reset -> [ not possible ]
+
+Source: XFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05
+Status: DEC? private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?40
+Mnemonic: DECCRNLM
+Description: Carriage return/new line mode
+
+set -> Enables LF to go with CR
+reset -> Disables (default)
+
+Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE107
+Status: DEC private; printers
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?40
+Description: Column switch control
+
+set -> Allow 80 <-> 132 mode
+reset -> Disallow 80 <-> 132 mode
+
+Source: XFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05
+Status: xterm private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?41
+Description: print direction
+
+set -> Prints from left to right
+reset -> Prints bidirectionally
+
+Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE41
+Status: DEC private; LA210
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?41
+Description: more(1) fix
+
+set -> This option indicates that xterm should work
+ around a bug in the more(1) program that causes it
+ to incorrectly display lines that are exactly the
+ width of the window and are followed by a line
+ beginning with a tab (the leading tabs are not
+ displayed).
+
+reset -> This option indicates that xterm should not work
+ around the more(1) bug mentioned above.
+
+Source: XFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05
+Source: XFree86: xc/programs/xterm/xterm.man,v 3.52 1999/09/27 06:30:25
+Status: xterm private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?42
+Mnemonic: DECNRCM
+Description: Nat Repl Char
+
+set -> enable
+reset -> disable
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt220_codes.txt>
+Status: DEC private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?43
+Mnemonic: DECGEPM
+Description: Expanded/compressed print mode
+
+set -> Select an expanded image for a graphics print screen.
+reset -> Select a compressed image for a graphics print screen.
+
+Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
+Status: DEC private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?44
+Mnemonic: DECGPCM
+Description: Print color/black and white mode
+
+set -> Send a color image to the printer for a graphics print screen.
+
+reset -> Send a black and white image to the printer for a graphics
+print screen.
+
+Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
+Status: DEC private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?44
+Description: Margin bell
+
+set -> Turn on margin bell
+reset -> Turn off margin bell
+
+Source: XFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05
+Status: xterm private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?45
+Mnemonic: DECGPCS
+Description: Print color syntax
+
+set -> Select the RGB color format for a graphics print screen.
+reset -> Select the HLS color format for a graphics print screen.
+
+Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
+Status: DEC private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?45
+Description: Reverse-wraparound mode
+
+set -> Reverse-wraparound mode
+reset -> No reverse-wraparound mode
+
+Source: XFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05
+Status: xterm private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?46
+Mnemonic: DECGPBM
+
+set -> Send the entire graphics image, including the background, to
+the printer for a graphics print screen.
+
+reset -> Send the graphics image, except for the background, to the
+printer for a graphics print screen.
+
+This applies only when the DECGPCM function is set to send a color image.
+
+Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
+Status: DEC private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?46
+Description: Logging mode
+
+set -> Start logging (normally disabled by a compile-time option)
+reset -> Stop logging
+
+Source: XFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05
+Status: xterm private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?47
+Mnemonic: DECGRPM
+Description: Print rotated/compressed mode
+
+set -> Send a graphics image to the printer rotated 90 degrees.
+
+reset -> Send a compressed image to the printer.
+
+Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
+Status: DEC private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?47
+Description: Alternate screen mode
+
+set -> Use alternate screen buffer (unless disabled by the titeInhibit
+ resource)
+reset -> Use normal screen buffer
+
+Source: XFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05
+Status: xterm private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?51
+Mnemonic: DECBWRM
+Description: Black/white reversal mode
+
+Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE123
+Status: DEC private; LCP01
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?52
+Mnemonic: DECOPM
+Description: Origin placement mode
+
+set -> Places origin to corner of paper
+reset -> Places origin to corner of printable area (default)
+
+Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE110
+Status: DEC private; LA100, LN03
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?55
+Mnemonic: DECBPM
+Description: Bold page mode
+
+Source: DEC Terminals and Printers Handbook 1985 EB 26291-56 pE123
+Status: DEC private; LCP01
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?60
+Mnemonic: DECHCCM
+Description: Horizontal cursor coupling
+
+This control function determines whether the user window pans with the
+cursor when the cursor moves past the right or left border of the user
+window. DECHCCM is only useful when the width of the current user
+window is narrower than the page. The cursor must stay on the current
+page.
+
+set -> Couple the cursor to the display. By default the cursor is
+coupled to the display for horizontal movement. When the cursor moves
+past the right or left border of the user window, the window pans to
+keep the cursor in view. If the cursor moves past the left border of
+the display, the user window pans to the left and new columns appear
+at the right border of the window.
+
+reset -> Uncouple the cursor from the display. If the cursor is
+uncoupled from the display and is moved past the right or left border
+of the user window, the cursor disappears from view.
+
+Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
+Status: DEC private; VT400
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?61
+Mnemonic: DECVCCM
+Description: Vertical cursor coupling
+
+This mode determines whether the user window pans with the cursor when
+the cursor moves past the top or bottom border of the user
+window. DECVCCM is only useful when the height of the current user
+window is smaller than the page. The cursor must stay on the current
+page.
+
+set -> Couple the cursor to the display. By default the cursor is
+coupled to the display for vertical movement. When the cursor moves
+past the top or bottom border of the user window, the window pans to
+keep the cursor in view. If the cursor moves past the top of the
+display, the user window pans up and new lines appear at the top of
+the screen.
+
+reset -> Uncouple the cursor from the display. If the cursor is
+uncoupled from the display and is moved past the top or bottom border
+of the user window, the cursor disappears from view.
+
+Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
+Status: DEC private; VT400
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?64
+Mnemonic: DECPCCM
+
+This control function determines if a new page appears in the display
+when the cursor moves to a new page. DECPCCM is only useful with a
+multiple-page format.
+
+set -> Couple the cursor to the display. By default the cursor is
+coupled to the display when the cursor moves to a new page. The new
+page appears in the display to keep the cursor in view.
+
+reset -> Uncouple the cursor. If the cursor is uncoupled from the
+display and is moved to a new page, the cursor disappears from view.
+
+Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
+Status: DEC private; VT400
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?66
+Mnemonic: DECNKM
+Description: Numeric keypad
+
+set -> application
+reset -> numeric
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt220_codes.txt>
+Status: DEC private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?67
+Mnemonic: DECBKM
+Description: Backspace/delete
+
+set -> <X| sends backspace
+reset -> <X| sends delete
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_terminals_news.txt>
+Status: DEC private; VT320
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?68
+Mnemonic: DECKBUM
+Description: Typewriter
+
+set -> data process
+reset -> typewriter
+
+Source: <URL:http://www.cs.utk.edu/~shuford/terminal/dec_vt220_codes.txt>
+Status: DEC private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?80
+Mnemonic: DECSDM
+Description: Sixel scrolling
+
+set -> enable sixel scrolling (screen scrolls if sixel graphics hit bottom)
+reset -> disable sixel scrolling
+
+Source: Reflection TRM (VT) Version 7.0
+Status: DEC private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?1000
+Description: X11 normal mouse tracking
+
+Parameters (such as pointer position and button number) for all mouse
+tracking escape sequences generated by xterm encode numeric parameters
+in a single character as value+32. For example, ! specifies the value
+1. The upper left character position on the terminal is denoted as 1,1.
+
+Normal tracking mode sends an escape sequence on both button press and
+release. Modifier key (shift, ctrl, meta) information is also sent. It
+is enabled by specifying parameter 1000 to DECSET. On button press or
+release, xterm sends CSI M CbCxCy. The low two bits of Cb encode button
+information: 0=MB1 pressed, 1=MB2 pressed, 2=MB3 pressed, 3=release.
+The upper bits encode the modifiers which were down when the button was
+pressed and are added together. 4=Shift, 8=Meta, 16=Control. Cx and Cy
+are the x and y coordinates of the mouse event. The upper left corner
+is (1,1).
+
+Source: XFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05
+Status: xterm private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?1001
+Description: X11 hilite mouse tracking
+
+Mouse hilite tracking notifies a program of a button press, receives a
+range of lines from the program, highlights the region covered by the
+mouse within that range until button release, and then sends the program
+the release coordinates. It is enabled by specifying parameter 1001 to
+DECSET. Highlighting is performed only for button 1, though other but-
+ton events can be received. Warning: use of this mode requires a coop-
+erating program or it will hang xterm. On button press, the same infor-
+mation as for normal tracking is generated; xterm then waits for the
+program to send mouse tracking information. All X events are ignored
+until the proper escape sequence is received from the pty: CSI Ps ; Ps ;
+Ps ; Ps ; Ps T . The parameters are func, startx, starty, firstrow, and
+lastrow. func is non-zero to initiate hilite tracking and zero to
+abort. startx and starty give the starting x and y location for the
+highlighted region. The ending location tracks the mouse, but will
+never be above row firstrow and will always be above row lastrow. (The
+top of the screen is row 1.) When the button is released, xterm reports
+the ending position one of two ways: if the start and end coordinates
+are valid text locations: CSI t CxCy. If either coordinate is past the
+end of the line: CSI T CxCyCxCyCxCy. The parameters are startx, starty,
+endx, endy, mousex, and mousey. startx, starty, endx, and endy give the
+starting and ending character positions of the region. mousex and
+mousey give the location of the mouse at button up, which may not be
+over a character.
+
+Source: XFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05
+Status: xterm private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?1002
+Description: X11 button-event mouse tracking
+
+Button-event tracking is essentially the same as normal tracking, but
+xterm also reports button-motion events. Motion events are reported
+only if the mouse pointer has moved to a different character cell. It
+is enabled by specifying parameter 1002 to DECSET. On button press or
+release, xterm sends the same codes used by normal tracking mode. On
+button-motion events, xterm adds 4 to the event code (the third charac-
+ter, Cb). The low two bits of the event code encode the button informa-
+tion. The third bit is set to indicate motion. Additional bits specify
+modifier keys as in normal mode. For example, motion into cell x,y with
+button 1 down is reported as CSI M @ CxCy. ( @ = 32 + 0 (button 1) +
+32 (motion indicator) ). Similarly, motion with button 3 down is
+reported as CSI M B CxCy. ( B = 32 + 2 (button 3) + 32 (motion indica-
+tor) ).
+
+Source: XFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05
+Status: xterm private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?1003
+Description: X11 any-event mouse tracking
+
+Any-event mode is the same as button-event mode, except that all motion
+events are reported instead of just those that enter a new character
+cell. It is enabled by specifying 1003 to DECSET.
+
+Source: XFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05
+Status: xterm private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?1010
+Description: Scroll to bottom on tty output
+
+set -> Scroll to bottom on tty output
+reset -> Don't scroll to bottom on tty output
+
+Source: XFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05
+Status: rxvt private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?1011
+Description: Scroll to bottom on key press
+
+set -> Scroll to bottom on key press
+reset -> Don't scroll to bottom on key press
+
+Source: XFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05
+Status: rxvt private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?1035
+Description: Special modifiers
+
+set -> Enable special modifiers for Alt and NumLock keys
+reset -> Disable special modifiers for Alt and NumLock keys
+
+Source: XFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05
+Status: xterm private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?1047
+
+set -> Use alternate screen buffer (unless disabled by the titeInhibit
+ resource)
+reset -> Use Normal Screen Buffer, clearing screen first if in the
+ Alternate Screen (unless disabled by the titeInhibit
+ resource)
+
+Source: XFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05
+Status: xterm private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?1048
+
+set -> Save cursor as in DECSC (unless disabled by the titeInhibit
+ resource)
+reset -> Restore cursor as in DECRC (unless disabled by the
+ titeInhibit resource)
+
+Source: XFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05
+Status: xterm private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?1049
+
+set -> Save cursor as in DECSC and use Alternate Screen Buffer,
+ clearing it first (unless disabled by the titeInhibit resource)
+reset -> Use Normal Screen Buffer and restore cursor as in DECRC (unless
+ disabled by the titeInhibit resource)
+
+Source: XFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05
+Status: xterm private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?1051
+Description: Sun function-key mode
+
+Source: XFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05
+Status: xterm private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?1052
+Description: HP function-key mode
+
+Source: XFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05
+Status: xterm private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Mode: ?1061
+Description: Sun/PC keyboard mode
+
+Source: XFree86: xc/doc/specs/xterm/ctlseqs.ms,v 3.29 1999/09/27 06:29:05
+Status: xterm private
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------